Tải bản đầy đủ (.doc) (156 trang)

anh 9 tron bo

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (687.21 KB, 156 trang )

<span class='text_page_counter'>(1)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=1>

Planning day: 16 / 08 /02010
Teaching day: 19 / 08 / 2010
Period 01:


REVISION



<b>* Objective:</b>


By the end of the lesson,ss will be able to remember vocabulary and some
structures which they have learnt


Practice four skills.


<b>* Language contents</b>
Vocabulary


Grammar: - Tenses: Present perfect
Past simple


How to use kind of words( V, adv, adj)
<b>* Teaching aids:</b>


Extraboard
<b>* Teaching procedures:</b>


Stabilization


New lesson


<b>Contents</b> <b> Activities</b>



A. Warm up:


Sing an English song
B. Practice:


1/ Matching Match 1 part in column A
with a suitable one in column B


A


1. What did you do in the summer
holiday?


2. Have you done your homework yet?
3. Did you watch TV last night?


4. How long have you learnt English?
B


a.Yes, I did


b.I visited my grandparents, friends and
tidied my house


c.For three years
d.Yes, I have
Key:


1- b, 2- d, 3- a, 4- c
 Present perfect



Form:S + have/has + V(3)
S + have/has(not)+ V(3)


Have/has + S + V(3)?
*Adv: for:period of time


Since: point of time
Yet in question


Eg: We have learnt English for 3 years
Or I’m tired, I have just played soccer


 Past simple
Form: S + V(ed)


S + didn’t + V(inf)
Did + S + V(inf)?


 adv: last, yesterday, ago…
eg: I taught English in Man Duc
school 5 years ago.


Eg;Yesterday,I stayed at home


2/ How to use kind of words(adv, adj, V)
Adj Adv


Quick quickly



T hangs extraboard
Ss do


T checks, correct if necessary


T asks ss about tenses of the above
sentences


Ss answer


T reminds the useage


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(2)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=2>

Slow slowly
Tired tiredly
Beautiful beautifully


 Adj: often after” be’’ and before”
n’’


 Adv: after” V’’
Eg: Lan runs slowly
She is beautifull
She is a beautifull girl
3/ Exercise


Choose the correct answer
1. They are ( intelligent/


intelligently)ss. They do
exercises ( quick/ quickly)


2. ( Does/ is) Mai beautifull?)
3. I( taught/ have taught) English


for 12 years.


4. Have you seen our new
teacher( yet/ ago)


T aks ss to retell some adv, adj,V


S make their own sentences


T hangs the extraboard
S do individually


 give the answer
T checks & corrects if necessary
<b>*summary</b>:T asks Ss to retll the knowledge they’ve just learnt .


<b>* Homework</b>


S: Learn by heart structures, make 2 senteces for each structure
Prepare unit 1


<b>*Comment</b>: ……….


<b>*KÝ duyệt của chuYên môn</b>:


Planning day: 17 / 08 / 2010
Teaching day: 19 / 08 / 2010


Period : 02




<b>Unit 1:a visit from a pen pal</b>



<b>lesson1: getting started +listen and read</b>




<b>* objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to get more information about a
visiting from a penpal


<b>* LANGUAGE CONTENTS</b>




- present a visit to a pen pal


- introduce Vietnam country to foreigners Pictures, flashcards, extra
board, textbook, cassette


<b>* teaching aids:</b>
<b> * procedure:</b>




<b>Content</b> <b>Activities</b>



<b>A. warm up.</b>


Play the game: The famous places in
Hanoi


<b> </b>


Ss play the game :name the famous
places in Hanoi


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(3)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=3>

<b>B.New lesson.</b>


<b> * getting started.</b>




Eg: I think I would take my pen pal to
Ho Chi Minh‘s Mausoluem...


<b>*listen and read</b>


I1.presentation


Lan’s Malaysian, Maryam visited her
last week .Where did LAN take
Maryam to?


* Listen
new words :



- mosque (n) nhà thờ hồi giáo
- correspond (v) trao đổi th tín
- be impressed by :ấn tợng bởi
- pray(v) cầu nguyện


<i><b>II. Practice</b></i>


* Choose the best option to complete the
sentences


Key 1- C 3- D
2- B 4- B
Read the text aloud and check
<i><b> </b></i>


<i><b>III. Production</b></i>


True or false statements


a.Lan’s pen pal comes from Malaysia
b.Kuala Lumpur is a small city


c.The girls visited Hang Luoc street on
Monday


d.They will write to each other again.
key: a. - True


b. - false


c. - false
d.- True


Ex2: If your pen pal visit you next
weekeend, where will you take him.


Minh’s Mausoluem,...


T introduces pictures and ask some
questions.


Ss look at the pictures and answer
the questions.


The pictures in text book..


T sets a scene: Imagine that a
foreign pen pal is coming to stay
with you for a week .what activities
would you like to do during the
visit. The pictures in the book may
help you.


Ss.say the activities


T sets the scene then ask for
prediction


write the places that Maryam
visited on the aboard .



T turns on the cassette


Ss listen and guess the answer
* read the text again


Ss listen to the text, read the text
silently.


Ss write the places on the board by
reading the text again


1st<sub>: work in pairs/ groups</sub>
2nd<sub>: Play out to check</sub>
T: ask to check


Ss.read the text again
Ss.do the Ex in groups
Ss.read the text aloud


? Ss.work in pairs to answer the Qs
T checks.


? Ss work in groups.
T checks.


<b>*summary:</b>T asks Ss to retll the knowledge they’ve just learnt .


<b>* Homework</b>



S: Learn by heart vacabs&redo all exs
Prepare unit 1(speak+listen)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(4)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=4>

………
*<b>Kí duyệt của chuYên môn:</b>


Planning day: 18 / 08 / 2010
Teaching day: 21 / 08 /2010
Period 03:


<b>unit 1:a visit from a pen pal</b>



<b>lesson2: speak + listen</b>
<b>* objectives:</b>


<b> </b>


By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to improve their speaking skill by
introducing one’s self to the others and repeating the introduction


Listen to a visit to other country
<b>* language contents:</b>


<b>-</b> introducing one’s self to the other


<b>-</b> repeating the introduction
- choose the right pictures


- talk about Carol”svisit to the USA


<b> </b>


<b>*teaching aids :</b>


Pictures, flashcards, extraboard, textbook.
<b> *procedure </b>


<b>Content</b> <b>Activities</b>


<b>A.warm up:</b>


Have ss introduce themselves


<b>B.New lesson.</b>


<b>Speak</b>


<i><b>I. Pre- speaking</b></i>
Key:


1 - c - 5 - b - 4 - d - 2 - e - 3 - a - 6.
<i><b>2- While- speaking: </b></i>


Model dialogue


Tuan: Are you Paul?
Paul: That’s right, I am


Tuan: Very nice to meet you. Let me
introduce myself. I am Tuan, I’m 15


years old.


Paul: Me too. Do you live in VN?
Tuan: Yes, I do.Is it the first time you
have been to HN?


Paul: Yes, It’s the first time. Hn is a
very nice city, people are very


Ss: My name is Lan
I am a student
I like watching TV
...
T introduces the situation


<i>Nga is talking to Maryam, they are</i>
<i>waiting for Lan outside her class. Now</i>
<i>put the dialogue in the correct order to</i>
<i>make a complete one</i>


SS do individually first, then share the
answer with their partner


T gives out the correct answer


S : practice in pairs , then read aloud
T asks ss to use the informations in the
book to make similar dialogues


Ss work in pairs



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(5)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=5>

friendly.


Tuan: Where do you live in England?
Do you live in a city?


Paul: I live in Liverpool. It’s an
industrial city in the north of England.
Have you ever been there?


Tuan: No, I hope I’ll be able to go
there next summer.


<b>Listen</b>
<i><b>I. Pre- listening</b></i>


pictures <sub>guess</sub>Ss Ss listen <sub>correct</sub>T


a
b
c


II .while- listening
<i><b> Key : a) 1</b></i>


b) 2
c) 2


<i><b>IV.Post- listening</b></i>



Recall Carlo’s visit


T shows the pictures in listening and
ask ss to compare


Ss find out the differences between 2
pict


a/ in pict 1 we don’t allowed to walk
on the grass and in pict 2 we aren’t
allowed to pick flowers


b/ in pict 1 the bus is red and its
number is 103 and in pict 2 the bus is
blue and its number is 130


c/ in pict 1 it is the Mexican
restaurant and in pict 2 it’s the
American one


T gives out the task of listening, have ss
guess before they listen


Ss write their guessing
? Ss work in groups.
T checks.


? Ss work in groups.
T checks.



<b>*summary:</b>T asks Ss to retll the knowledge they’ve just learrt .


<b>* Homework: Learn vacabs & redo all exs, Make two dialogues like Nga & </b>
Maryam. Write Carlo’s visit.


<b>*Comment</b>:...


*<b>Kí duyệt của chuYên môn:</b>


Planning day: 20 / 08 / 2010
Teaching date :23 / 08 / 2010
Period :04




<b>unit1: a visit from a pen pal</b>



<b> </b>


<b>lesson 4: read</b>
<b> * objectives: </b>


<b> By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to get some more information about </b>
Malaysia


- know about the geography, population, language, religions of Malaysia and
the content of the te other countries of ASEAN


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(6)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=6>

- understand txt by doing some exercises


<b>*LANGUAGE CONTENTS:</b>


Budhism,climate,comprise,compulsory,divide,Hindusm,Islam,official,region,
religion,separate,tropical


Malaysia: - currency(n)
- comprise(v)
- Climate (n)
- Official religion


- Compulsory second language


Flashcards, extraboard, textbook, Map of ASEAN.
<b>* TEACHING AIDS:</b>


<b>*procedure.</b>


<b>Content</b> <b>Activities</b>


<b>A.warm up:</b>


Play a game “brainstorming”





BRUNEY


<b>B.New lesson</b>


<i><b>I.</b><b>pre-reading</b></i>
*The Map:


Ex1:Prediction
Vacabs:


- climate(n): khÝ hËu.
- official(a): chÝnh thøc.
- compulsory(a) b¸t béc
- region(n) vïng miền
- religion(n) tôn giáo


- Buddhism ,Hinduism ,Islam


<i> II .<b>while- reading</b></i>


<b>Read:</b>


Read the text.


Correct Ex1:Prediction
Ex2:True or False


1- True
2- False
3- false
4- True





Ss play the game


T presents the map of ASEAN and
asks Ss to find Malaysia.


Ss listen, look at the map and find


Ss do the Ex1:prediction in group


Malaysia you think


1.Area
2.Population
3.Climate


4.Unit of currency
5.Capital city
6.Official religion
7.National language
8.Compulsory
second anguage


...
..


...
..


...


..


...
..


1sr<sub> : T. reads</sub>
Ss.listen


2nd<sub>: Ss.read silently then check </sub>
their prediction


3rd<sub>: T. asks Ss. to correct Ex1,2</sub>
Ss read the text again to do the Ex
T checks


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(7)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=7>

5- True


Extra board:


<b>IV.Post-reading</b>


Match the name of the capitals with
appropriate countries:


1.Vietnam
2.Malaysia
3.Singapore
4.Indonesia
5.Philipines
6.Lao



7.Cambodia
8.Myanmar
9.Thailand
10.Brunei


a.Bangkok
b.Phnom Penh
c.Jakarta
d.Singapore
e.Bandar Seri
Begawan
f.Vientiane
g.Manila
h.Yangun
i.Hanoi
j.Kuala Lumpur


Ss match


T asks Ss to do on the board to
check and correct




<b>*summary:</b>T asks Ss to retll the knowledge they’ve just learnt .
<b>* Homework</b>


Learn vacabs & redo all exs



<b>*Comment</b>:...
...
*<b>Kí duyệt của chuYên môn</b>:


Planning day: 06 / 09 / 2010
Teaching day: 09 / 09 / 2010
Period 05


<b>unit1:A visit from a pen pal</b>



<b>lesson 4: write</b>
<b>* objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to
-Write a letter


- Use the outline to write a letter to their relatives or friends to talk about
their visit to somewhere


<b> * language contents:</b>


+ Past tense and present perfect & future
<b>* teaching aids :</b>


Flashcards, extraboard, textbook
<b>* procedure:</b>


<b>Content</b> <b>Activities</b>



A<b>.warm up.</b>


Remind the old lesson.


Answer some Qs about the last
lesson:


<b>1</b>. How many religions are there in
Malaysia?


<b>2</b>. What is the population of this


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(8)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=8>

country?


<b>3</b>.How many language are widely
spoken in Malaysia


<b>4</b>. What is Malaysian compulsory
second language?


<b>B. New lession. </b>


<b>I. Pre-writing: </b>


* Present the lesson (using EB)
1. Have you ever visited Hanoi or
other places in Vietnam?


2. When did you arrive in....?



3. Which places did you visit when
you were there?


4. Who did you meet during the visit?
5. What kind of food did you eat?
6. What did you buy?


7. How do you feel about the visit?
Imagine you are visiting your


relatives or friends in another part of
Vietnam or in a different country.
Write a letter to your family


*Form of a letter
*Read the outline


- How many paragraphs are there in a
letter?


T.points at the Qs in extra board and
asks :What Qs in:the first paragraph?
the second


paragraph?


the third paragraph?





<b>II .While writing</b>


Work in groups to write the letter




T presents the lesson by using the
extra board


Ss look at the board and answer


T sets a scence: Imagine you are
visiting your relatives or friends in
another part of VN or in different
country


Ss.listen


Ss say the form of a letter
Ss read the outline silently
T asks & Ss.answer.


Ss look at the Qs again and find
-First paragraph:say when we arrived
and who met us at the bus/train station
- Second paragraph :Talk


* what we’ve done
* places we’ve visited


* people we’ve met
* food we’ve tried
* things we’ve bought
_ Third paragraph:


*tell how we feel(happy /disappionted
..)


*say what interests us most (people
/places/ activities...)


*mention when we return home
T asks Ss to work in groups


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(9)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=9>

<b>iiI. Post speaking</b>


Ss present their letter


T has each group present their letter
on the board


Correct the mistakes
<b>*summary:</b>T asks Ss to retll the knowledge they’ve just learnt .


<b>* Homework</b>


Learn vacabs & redo all exs


Write a letter to your friend to tell about your last visit
<b>*Comment</b>: ………



………
*<b>KÝ duyÖt của chuYên môn</b>:




Planning day: 13/ 09 / 2010
Teaching day: 16 / 09 /2010
Period : 06




<b>Unit 1 : a visit from a pen pal</b>



<b>lesson 5 : language focus</b>
<b> * objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to use the structures to practice doing
exercises


- remember the simple past tense and its use
<b>*LANGUAGE CONTENTS:</b>


+ Past simple


+ The past simple with “ wish”.
<b>* TEACHING AIDS:</b>


Flashcards, extraboard, textbook.
<b>*procedure.</b>



<b>Content</b> <b>Activities</b>


<b>A.warm up:</b> Change these verb in to the
past simple tense:


go give meet
do come smoke
take eat build
B.new leson


<b>B.New lesson</b>
<i> I.<b>pre-reading</b></i>


<b>Action1:The simple past tense.</b>


- Form: ?
- Use:?
-Form:


Do the Exs in text book.


Ex1:Work with a partner.Ask and answer Qs
about each person did on the weekend




T gives a sery of verbs.


Ss look at the given verbs ,then


change them into simple past .
Eg: went,came,did ,ate ,met, ....


T asks Ss to retell the form and use
of the past simple tense


Ss listen and look at the example.
Ss give the form and use


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(10)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=10>

<b>Action2 </b>:The simple past with “wish”
T.gives situation to present the form of
“wish”


1.I am old


_ I wish I were young.
2.I don’t have a car
_ I wish I had a car


<b> Use:</b>để diễn tả ớc muốn khơng có thực ở
hiện tại hoặc khơng thể sảy ra đợc ở hiện
Ss.make sentences with “wish”


<b> were</b>


<b>Form: S1+WISH(es) +S2</b>


<b> v- ed</b>
<i><b>II .</b><b>while- reading</b></i>



1<b>.</b>Ex1.Ask & answer what each person did
Ss1:What did Nga do on weekend?


Ss2:She went to the concert-Ha Noi
Singers


Ss1:...
Ss2:...


2.Ex2. Lan and her friends did to
prepare for the party


Pc1:made a cake


Pic2:hung colorful lamps on the wall in
the room.


Pic3:bought flowers.


Pic4:painted a picture of Hanoi.
Pic5: went shopping


3.Ex.Write wishes you want to make in
these situation


a.I wish I were tall.


b.I wish I were in the swimming pool n..
c.I wish I had a computer.



d.I wish I lived near school.
e.I wish I had a sister


f.I wish I drew well


g.I wish I had my friend’s number.
h.I wish I knew many friends.


i.I wish there were some rivers and lakes in
my hometown.


<i><b>IV.</b><b>Post-reading</b></i>


T.asks Ss to work in group and write their
own wishes.


eg:Lan wishes she studied well


T checks


Ss do the Ex


T guides Ss to do.
Ss do pairs.


T checks


Ss.work in group


Ss.write their wishes


T checks


Ss do
T cheks


<b>*summary:</b>T asks Ss to retll the knowledge they’ve just learnt .
<b>* Homework: Learn vacabs & redo all exs</b>


<b>*Comment</b>:... *<b>Kí </b>
<b>duyệt của chuYên môn:</b>




</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(11)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=11>



<b>unit2: clothing</b>



<b>lesson1: getting started + listen and read</b>


<b>* objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to :


- ask and answer about the habit of someone about clothing


- know about the traditional dress of some countries and Vietnamese traditional
dress.


<b>*LANGUAGE CONTENTS:</b>


<b>I/ vovabulary: </b>


loose pant , cross, design ,designer, fashion,inspiration ,materal ,minority,
poet ,poetry,slit , stripe,subject,tunic,unique




<b>*procedure.</b>


<b>Content</b> <b>Activities</b>


<b>A.warm up:</b>


Rewite the folowing sentencces beginning
<i><b>with I wish ....</b></i>“ ”


1.I can’t speak English fluently.
2.It is hot today.


3.I don’t have a new bicycle.


<b>B.New lesson </b>


<i><b>I.Presentation</b></i><b>.</b>
<b>@.</b>Getting started


a.She comes form Jappan.
b.She comes form Viet Nam.
c. She comes form Scotland.
d. She comes form India.


e. He comes form USA.
f. She comes form Arabia.


<i> @<b> Listen and read.</b></i>
*The Aodai.


eg: Do you like to wear it?
When do you often wear it?
*New vocab:


- along silk tunic


- loose pants =baggy trousers
- ethnic minorities -inspiration
- the unique dress


* Listen -> role play the dialogue
II .Practice


<i><b>*Reading the text</b></i>


<i>Ex1 :complete the sentences using the </i>
<i>information from the passage.</i>


a. For along time the Aodai has been the
subject of....


Ss.rewrite


1.I wish I could speak English


fluently.


2.I wish It weren’t hot today.
I wish I had a new bicycle.


aT. show picts on the board and ask
some questions


Ss.look at the pictures
Ss.answer the questions
Eg :picture 1


She is from Japan


She is wearing a Kimono


T. set the scene by asking some qs
about the Aodai


Ss. answer the questions
1st<sub>: Listen</sub>


2nd<sub>: repeat</sub>
3rd<sub>: read</sub>


4th<sub>: Write and make sentences</sub>
T turns on the tape then ask Ss. to
play.



Ss listen -> role play the dialogue
Ss read the text silently to do the
Ex


...poems, novels and songs


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(12)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=12>

b.the Aodai is descibed as a...


c.The majority of Vietnamese women
prefer ...


d. Some designers have modernized the
aodai by printing...


e.Another alternative is to add...


<i>Ex2:Answer the questions: </i>


a.Who used to wear the Aodai by the
tradition?


b.why do the minority of Vietnamese
women prefer to wear modern clothing at
work these days?


c.What have fashion designers done to
modernize the Aodai?


<i><b>IV.</b><b>Post-reading</b></i>



<b>*true or false statements:</b>


a.The Aodai is the traditional dress of


Vietnamese women. T


b.The Aodai has been the subjects of


poems,novels songs . T


c.Vietnamese women usually wear


Aodai on special days. T


d.Some fashion designers want to


change the traditional Aodai. T
e.The majority of Vietnamese prefer to


wear Aodai at work F


f.The design and material used for
men weren’t different from those used


for women F


sides worn over loose pants


...to wear modern clothing at work.
...line of poetry on it.



...symbolls such as suns
,stars,crosses and stripes.


Ss.read the text again ,then do the
Ex in pairs


1.Traditionally,men and women
used to wear the Aodai.


2.Because it is more convenient.
3.They have printed lines of poetry
on it or have added symbols such
as suns , stars, crosses and stripes
to the Aodai


T guides Ss to do.
? Ss work in group.
T checks.


<b>*summary:</b>T asks Ss to retll the knowledge they’ve just learnt .
<b>* Homework</b>


Learn vacabs & redo all exs


<b>*Comment</b>:...
...
*<b>KÝ dut cđa chuYªn m«n:</b>


Planning day: 20 / 09 /2010


Teaching day:


Period: 8


<b>Unit 2 : cLOTHING</b>



<b>LESSON 2: sPEAK</b>


<b>* objectives:</b>


By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(13)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=13>

- speak about the costume they wear on each occasion and the reason why
they wear those


-know about the traditional dress of some countries and Vietnamese
traditional dress.


<b>* LANGUAGE CONTENTS:</b>


<b> + </b>Past simple ( review)


+ Vocab: plaid, plain, short- sleeved blouse, sleeveless sweater, stripe,
baggy pant, faded jeans.


<b>* teaching aids :</b>


pictures ,flashcards ,extra board , textbook, real things
<b>*procedure</b>



<b>Content</b> <b>Activities</b>


<b>I. Warm up:</b>


Play a game :


“ Noughts or crosses”


traditional special convenient


poet designer pants


wear use take


<b> B. New lesson</b>


<b>speak</b>
<b> I. Pre-speaking:</b>


Matching the name of dress with the right
pictures


1...a 4....f 7....g
2...h 5....b 8....e
3....d 6....c 9....i


<b>II .While speaking</b>


<i><b>Make a survey using the questions</b></i>
<i><b>in the given survey</b></i>



1-What do you usually wear on the
weekend?


2-Why do you wear these clothes?


3-What is your favorite type of clothing?
Why?


4-Is school uniform comfortable?
5-What color is it?


6-What do you usually wear on the special
occation?


7-What clothes do you think are suitable to
wear on the special occasion?


* T=type ; * R=reason


<i><b>@. </b>Modal dialogue</i>.


S1:What do you usually wear on the
weeken?


S2:I usually wear a T-shirt with green
shorts.


S1: Why do you wear these clothes?
S2:they make me comfortable.


S1:……….


Ss play the game:
T sets a scence


Ss work in groups to talk about
their casuall clothes


T sets a scence


*Work in groups talking about
their casuall clothes that they
wear daily


* do an Ex


Ss do the Ex invidually ,then
compair with their partner


T asks Ss to take a survey


Ss.take the survey to complete
about your friends.


T asks Ss. to write 2 qs for the
last section.


Ss.discuss in groups to write two
questions for the last section of
the survey



Name weekend


T / R TetT / R Go to a party T / R
Ngoc


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(14)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=14>

S2:……….


<b>III.Post speaking</b>


Report the survey:


-Thre people said they usually wore
T-shit on the weekend.


- Dung sai she liked short-sleeved.


<b>V. home work </b>


Learn all the new words about clothes
take a servey about your costune on
weekend and holiday


<b>VI.comment</b>


T asks Ss to retell about your
partner’s hobbies clothes to
check and correct.


Eg : Ngoc ussually wear a T.shirt


and jeans on the weekends
because she feels comfortable
Ss. do the home work at home.


<b>*summary:</b>T asks Ss to retll the knowledge they’ve just learnt .
<b>* Homework</b>


Learn vacabs & redo all exs.


Write a dialogue what some one likes wearing & the reason.
<b>*Comment</b>:...
...
*<b>Kí duyệt của chuYên môn:</b>


Planning day: 23 / 09 / 2010
Teaching day:


Period 9


<b>unit2: clothing</b>



<b>lesson3 :lisen</b>
<b>* objectives:</b>


By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to
- Find out what Mary is wearing


- Talk about their favorites kinds of clothes
- Extra their vocabbulary about daily costune



<b>* language contents:</b>


- Present simple, presesnt continuos (review)


<b>*teaching aids :</b>


Pictures ,flashcards ,extraboard , textbook,cassette


<b>* procedure:</b>


<b>Content</b> <b>Activities</b>


<b>A.Warm up:</b>


Discribling game.


<b>B.new lesson.</b>


i. Pre-listening:
*The pictures :
a (A,B,C)


b ( A,B,C) c (A,B,C
 short- sleeved blouse
 long- sleeved blouse


blue short, red skirt,…..


T sets the scence



“ I’m 29 years old. I’m wearing a
T.shirt & a jean, I have a long black
hair. I’m wearing a pair of shoses –
black


? What I am wearing?


? Ss Listen, discuss and answer
-What do you call these clothes in
English?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(15)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=15>

number you think you hear
a


b
c


.A
...
...


.B....
...
...


<i><b>II .</b><b>While listening:</b></i>


Key



a, She is wearing a blue short
b, She is wearing a long sleeved
white blouse


c, She is wearing brown shoes


<b> </b>


<i><b>III.</b><b>Post- listening</b><b>:</b></i>


Ex1:answer the following questions<b>:</b>
<b>a.</b> How old is Mary?


<b>b.</b> What is she wearing?


<b>c.</b> What time was she last seen and
where?


<b>d.</b> What is she wearing with?


<b>e.</b> Wheere will you take her to if
you see her?


Key


a- three


b- blue shorts,a long sleeved white
blouseand brown shoes



c- 20 munites ago near the car fair
d- a large doll


e- the information desk


Ex 2:Retell the the public
announcement


begining with :A little girl,called Mary
was lost...


Set a scene :Mary,a three years old
girl lost at the car fair.


T uses the flashcards and asks Ss to
match the pictures with the words
Ss match the pictures with the words
T asks Ss to look at the pictures and
guess:What is Mary wearing?




Ss.listen to cheks what Mary is
wearing


1st<sub>: Listen and check the guessing</sub>
2nd<sub>: listen and research the </sub>


information


? Ss write aswers


Ss. check with the key then listen to
the last time.


? Ss answer the questions in pairs
T checks.


? Ss retell the announcement using
Ex1


T checks


<b>*summary:</b>T asks Ss to retll the knowledge they’ve just learnt .
<b>* Homework:</b>


-Talk about your favorite clothes
-Retell the public announcement.
-ex 1 Pg 12( ex- book)


- Prepare “ reading lesson”


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(16)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=16>

Planning day: 25 / 09 / 2010.
Teaching day:


Period: 10


<b>unit2: clothing</b>



<b>lesson 4: read</b>



<b>* objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to :
- know the history of jeans


- practise reading comprehention skill


- understand the content of the text by doing some exercises
<b>*language:</b>


1.vovabs


make from,name after,embroidered jeans, painted jeans,
2.structure


Revew the present perfect tense and passive form


* <b>teaching aids :</b>


flashcards ,extraboard , textbook, pictures of jeans, cassette.
<b>*</b>procedure


<b>Content</b> <b>Activities</b>


<b>a.Warm up:</b>


Play a game “brainstorming”


<b>-</b> Time



<b>-</b> Price


<b>-</b> How comfortable it is


<b>-</b> Yours hobbies of clothing


<b>B.new lesson</b>
<i><b>I .</b><b>Pre-reading</b></i>


1. Material
2. Style


3. embroidered
4.Label


5. Out of fashion
6.Generation


a.Kiểu cách
b.Lỗi thời
c.Thế hệ
d.chất liệu
e.Thêu
f.NhÃn hiÖu


<b> </b>


<b>1-</b> d 4-f



<b>2-</b> a 5-b


<b>3-</b> e 6-c


<i><b>II.</b><b>While -reading</b></i>
* listen once or twice:
* Do some Ex


Ex1:Fill in the missing dates and
words


1... :Workers liked to wear ...
because the material made from cotton
was very strong and hardly wear out


2. ... :A lot of university and
college


...wore jeans.


Ss play in groups
Ss discuss about jeans


T sets a scence, asks Ss to do
matching.


Ss listen to the T.
Ss work in group.
T checks.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(17)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=17>

3. ....:Jeans became ...so many
people began wearing jeans.
4. ...:Jeans became high
....clothing


5. ... :The ...of jeans stopped
going up


Key


1. 18th century
jeans cloth
2. 1960s
students


3. 1970s, cheaper
4. 1980s, fashion
5 . 1990s, sale


Ex2 Answer. then write the answers
in your Ex book.


1.Where does the word jeans come
from?
2.what was the 1960s’fashions?
3.Why did more people begin
wearing jeans in the 1970s?


4.When did jeans at last become
high



fashion clothing?
5.Why did the sale of jeans stop
Growing?


Key


1.The word “jeans “comes from a kind
of


material that was made in Europe
2.The 1960s’ fashion were embroidered
jeans, painted jeans and so on.


3, Because jeans became cheaper.
4. Jeans at last became high fash
clohting


in the 1980s .The sale of jeans
stopped


growing because


5. world wide economic situation got
worse in 1990s


<i><b>III.</b><b>Post- reading:</b></i>
True or false statements


Ss. listen to the tape


Ss. read the text silently


Ss. do Ex1 invidually ,then compare
with their partner


T checks


T guides Ss to do.
Ss work in pair
T checks


T guides Ss to do.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(18)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=18>

1.In 19th century,workers liked to wear
Jeans cloth. F
2.The material was very strong and it
didn’t wear out easily. T
3.The sale of Jeans stopped growing in
the 1980s. F
4.Embroidered Jeans ,painted Jeans
were


the 1960’ fashion. T


Ss work in group
T checks


<b>*summary:</b>T asks Ss to retll the knowledge they’ve just learnt .
<b>* Homework: - Answer the questions in the text book again.</b>
-Translate the text in to Vietnamese



*Comment::...


*<b>KÝ duyệt của chuyên môn:</b>


Planning day: 29 / 09 / 2010
Teaching day:


Period 11


<b>unit 2: clothing</b>



<b>lesson 5: write</b>


<b>*objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to
<b>* contents : In my opinion ...</b>


I think ...


First,...Second, Therefor, Conclusion
Be equal in; be proud of


Bear one’s name, f -write an argument using the out
line to persuade other to belive or do sth reedom of choice, self- confident
<b>*teaching aids :</b>


flashcards , extraboard , textbook


<b>*</b>procedure


<b>Content</b> <b>Activities</b>


<b>A.Warm- up</b>


Chatting


Do you like wearing uniforms or
casual


clothes at
school?


Why?


<b>B. New lesson</b>


<i><b>I.Pre-writing:</b></i>


1. Form of an argument


.An argument should have 3 parts( P
18)


+ Introduction


+ Series of arguments
+ Conclusion.



Ss work in groups
T writes tick note.


T. show out the form


Ss.listen & look . Then write in to the
notebooks


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(19)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=19>

-(T.uses extra board to explain)
Read the topic and outlineA then
read the paragraph


Secondary school Ss should wear
uniforms


T.explain the new words in the
paragraph


- encourage


- bear thier school name
- feel equal


- practical


- freedom of choice


Notice: firtly, secondly, thirstly, and
finally.



<b> </b>


Outline B:


<i>II .While writing:</i>


T.gives a written argument
My opinion is that secendary
school student should wear casual
clothes when they are school.
Fistly, wearing casual clothes is
comfortable.


Secondly, wearing casual clothes
gives Ss the freedom of choice. They
can choose the sizes,the clors,and
fashions,etc.


Finally, casual clothes makes Ss
feel sefl-confident when they are in
their favorite clothes.


Therefore, Ss in secondary shoud
wear casual clothes when they go to
school.


<i>III<b>.Post writing:</b></i>


*Correct in front of the class



*Play game: “classification”:




Ss. put the given words in their
correct column




<b>For</b> <b>Against</b>


Equal, …..


Ss. pay at tention to the underlined
Words


1st……<sub>.</sub>
2nd…<sub>.</sub>


Ss. listen, repeat, copy to the notebooks
T. reads and Ss listen then discuss with
partner


T.asks Ss to write thier own argument
T.asks Ss to work in groups to compare
their wrting


*Ss. take note


Ss.use the outline to write the argument


*Write a paragraph( 100- 150ws) to
support the argument that secondary
school Ss should wear casual clothes.
- Notice: + feel comfortable


+ feel self- confident
+ fredom


Ss.compare and give comment


T. asks Ss to read aloud to check and
correct




Ss. play the game


T. gives some words about “for or
against”, about wearing school
uniform: equal, comfortable,
self-confident, proud,practical, colorful,
uniform, casual clothes, lively....
<b>*summary:</b>T asks Ss to retll the knowledge they’ve just learnt .


<b>* Homework: Learn by heart the outline of two paragraph</b>
Write the argument again


Prepare the Language Focus Lesson


*Comment::...




</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(20)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=20>

Planning day:
Teaching day:


Period 12

<b> unit 2:clothing</b>



<b>Lesson 6: language focus</b>


<b> *objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to
-use the present ferfect tense
-review the passive form
*content: The present perfect


The passive
*<b>teaching aids :</b>


extraboard , textbook
*procedure


<b>Content</b> <b>Activities</b>


<b>A. warm up:</b>


a sery of verbs


Eg: go,come,do,eat,meet,...



gone, came, done, eaten, met, ....


<b>B.New lesson</b>


<i><b>I.presentation:</b></i>


Action1:The present perfect tense
Retell the form and use of the tense


S + have/has + Pastparticiple
Ex :We’ve live in Tan Lac for 14 years.


Action2: Passive form


The form of passive sentenses


Be + past participle


Ex: English is learnt by all student in
Coc village


<i>II.Practice.</i>


Do Ex1(page 19)


Find out the present perfect tense and
the prepositions


Practise the Dialogue in pairs
S1:Come & see my photo album.


S2:Lovely! Who’s this boy?


S1:Ah!It’s Quang, my brother friend.
S2:How long have you known him?
S1:I’ve known him for seven month.
S2:Have you seen him recently?


T. asks Ss to give a sery of verbs
Ss.look at the given verbs ,then
change them into past participle
ones .


T. asks , Ss.retell the form
Ss. say the use:


-để diễn đạt hành động sảy ra trong
quá khứ mà không rõ thời gian


-diễn đạt hành động xảy ra trong quá
khứ mà còn kéo dài đến hiện tại...


Ss. review the form of passive form


Ss. do Ex 1


Ss. find out the present ferfect
sentenses and the prepositions


Ss. practise in pairs to make similar
dialogue



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(21)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=21>

S1:No, I haven’t seen him since january.
He moved to HN city to learn.


Do Ex2 (page 20)


S1: Have you eaten Chinese food yet?
S2: Yes, I’ve already eaten it.


……….


Do Ex3 (page 20)


S1: Have you ever visited Hue?
S2: No, I haven’t.


Do Ex4( page 21)


Ex4: change in to passive


a.They made jean cloth completely from
cotton in the 18th century.


b.They grow rice in tropical contries.
c.They will produce five million bottles
of champagne in France next year.
d.Theyhave just introduced a new style
of jeans in the USA.


e.They have built two department stores


this year


Ex 5:Change in to passive
a.We can solve the problem


b. People should stop experiments on
animals


c.We might find life on another planet
d. we have to improve all the schools in
the city


e.They are going to build a new bridge
in the area


- ...
III .Production:


Rewrite the following sentenses using
the given words


1.A new bridge will be built in Hoa
Binh town


-They ...


2.They invited me to the party last night
-I ...


3.Jeans was made in the USA





? Ss work in pairs.
T checks.


a. Jean cloth was made


completelyfrom cotton in the 18th
century


b. Rice is grown in tropical contries
c. Five milion bottles of champagne
will be produced in France next year
d. A new style of jeans has just been
introduced in the USA


e.Two department stores have been
built this year


a.The problem can be solved


b. Experiments on animals should be
stopped


c. Liffe might be found on another
planet.


d. all the schools in the city have to
be improved



e. A new bridge is going to be built in
the area.


T. ask Ss to work in pairs , then play
out


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(22)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=22>

-They ...


4. We should give children a good
aducation at school.


-Children ...


Binh town


-I was invited to the party last night
-They made jeans in the USA
- Children should be given a good
aducation at school


<b>*summary:</b>T asks Ss to retll the knowledge they’ve just learnt .
<b>* Homework-L</b>earn the form of the structures by heart


- Do the Ex again


<b>*Comment:</b>:...


*<b>Kí duyệt của chuYên môn:</b>



Planning day:
Teaching day:
Period 13


<b>written test</b>



Time:45 minutes


<b> A - Aims : </b>


-Check Ss’knowledge from2 begining unites
-Definite Ss through their test


-T.has plan to help the bad Ss and change the best Ss group


<b>B - Contents:</b>


<b>Number one</b>


<b> I. Choose the best answer from A,B ,C or D (2marks)</b>


1.They have lived in that house ...many years.
A.in B.for C.since D.at


2.Vietnamese women usually the ao dai ,...on important celebrations
A. special B specially C. especial D. especially


3.Young peaple are fond of ...jeans



A.to wear B. wearing C .to wore D.worn
4.The USA has a...of around 250 million


A.population B.separation C. addition D introduction


<b>II Rewrite the following sentenses (3 marks)</b>


1. They will build a new bridge in Hoa Binh province.
- A new bridge...


2. I have a penpal in Hanoi but I have never visited her.
-I wish...


3.We can’t do this test quickly.


-This test ...
4.Did Peter buy a new house yesterday?


-Was...?


<b> III Give the correct verb form (3macks</b>)
1 .I (speak )...to him last Sunday.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(23)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=23>

3.Mai wishes she (be)...a lecture.
4.Jim (lose)... his bike sinse last month


<b> IV.Complete the passage using the given words:</b>


(look, from,other,from,wore,colorful,cloth ,about)



Clothes can tell a lot ...(1) a person.Some peole like very colorful clothes
because they want evryone to ...(2) at them and they want to be the centre of
thing. ...(3)peole like to wear nice clothes ,but their clothes are not ...(4)
or fancy.They do not like people to look at them .Clothes today are very


different...(5)the clothes of the 1800s.One difference is the way they look.For
example ,in 1800s,all women ...(6) dress.The dress all had long skirt.But today
women do not usually wear dresses with long skirt.Sometime they wear short
skirts.Sometimes they wear short skirts.Sometimes they wear pants .Another


difference between 1800s and today is the ...(7) .In 1800s,clothes were made
only from natural kinds of cloth.They were made from cotton ,wood silk,or


linen.But today,there are many kinds of manmade cloth.A lot of clothes are now
made ...(8) nynon.rayonor polyester.


<b> </b>


<b>Number two</b>


<b> I. Choose the best answer from A,B ,C or D(2marks)</b>


1.We were impressed by the ...of Hoa Binh people.


A.friend B.friendly C.friendship D.friendliness
2.Vietnamese women usually wear modern clothing ...work.


A. at B.in C. on D.during
3.Sales of jeans ... up and up in 1980s



A.to go B.go C .went D.gone
4.Vietnam is a ... of ASEAN


A.population B.country C.nation D.member


<b>II.Rewrite the following sentenses(2 marks)</b>


1.They are going to grow flowers in the garden.
- Flowers ...
2. I can not go fishing with my parents.


- I wish ...
3.We must finish this work on time


- This work ...
4.Did people make jeans two hundred years ago
- Were ...?


<b> III.Give the correct verb form(2marks</b>)


1.He is a fashion designer . He loves (design)... clothes
2.I (invite) ...Lan to my birthday party two days ago
3.Mai wishes she (have)...a brother.


4.I (not see)...my father since my birthday


<b>IV.Find and correct the mistakes in these sentences( 2 marks)</b>


1.I wish I can speak Chinese fluently.



...
2.Rice are grown in Vietnam .


...
3.A new road is going to build in Hoa Binh town.
...


<b> </b>4.She have never been to Malaysia.


...


<b>V.Complete the passage using the given words:</b>


<b>(look , from , other , from , wore , colorful , cloth , about)</b>


<i><b> Clothes can tell a lot ...(1) a person.Some peole like very colorful clothes </b></i>
because they want everyone to ...(2) at them and they want to be the centre of
thing. ...(3)peole like to wear nice clothes ,but their clothes are not ...(4)
or fancy.They do not like people to look at them .Clothes today are very


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(24)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=24>

women do not usually wear dresses with long skirt.Sometimes they wear short
skirts..Sometimes they wear pants.


Another difference between 1800s and today is the ...(7) .In 1800s,clothes
were made only from natural kinds of cloth.They were made from cotton ,wood
,silk,or linen.But today,there are many kinds of manmade cloth.


A lot of clothes are now made ...(8) nynon,rayon or polyester.


<b>C .comments </b>



Exellent: ... %... Everage: ... % ...
Good : ... %... Bad: ... %...


Planning day:
Teaching day:
Period 15




<b>unit 3:a trip to the countryside</b>



lesson1: getting started +listen and read


<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to :
- Get acquainted with the topic of countryside
- Know the picnic of Ba’s family


- Be got languages of the lesson’s topic


<b> B: teaching aids :</b>


Pictures ,flash cards ,extra board , text book
<b>c:languagecontent:</b>


<i> I. Vovabulary: </i>


feed, plow, water, fly a kite, harvest crops, bamboo forest, banyan tree, the entrance to the
village, shrine



<i> II. Structure:</i>


- Past simple tense


- Modal verbs with “could”


<b> D. procedure:</b>


.


<b>I. warm up : </b>


1. Do you oftten go to the countryside?
2. Are you familiar with the country life?
3. Do you like the countrylife?


4. What activities do yuo usually see in the
country?


+ Present the lesson.


- What do you see in picture 1, 2...?
- What is she/ he doing?


- where are they?


<b>II. </b>


<b> presentation:</b>



1. Do you usually come back to the
countryside?


2. When did you last do that ?


3. How did you get there? and with whom?
4. What did you see on the way to the village?


T. asks Ss some questions
Ss. answer the T’s questions


T. sets a scence
T. gets the answers.


Ss. look at thepictures in text book and discribe the
pictures


Pc1. water the vegetables
Pc2. swim in the river.
Pc3. collect the eggs
Pc4. harvest the crop
Pc5. feed the pigs
Pc6. plow with buffalo
Pc7. fly a kite


Pc8. play soccer


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(25)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=25>

T. presents new words
- paddy field



- bamboo forest
- banyan tree


- the entrance to the village
- shrine


<i>* Open prediction Ex</i>(Exa in text book)


<i>* Read the text silently </i>


<b>III .practice:</b>


<i> Ex1: Read the text and check their prediction</i>


Ex2: Answer the questions:
1. Where is Ba’village?


2. How did Ba and his family get to the
village?


3. Where is the banyan tree?


4. What did they see in the mountain?
5. Where did they have their picnic?
6. What did Liz do to show the trip to her
parents?


7. What does Liz wish?



<b>IV. production </b>
<i>Play a game network</i>“ ”


- Bamboo forest
I<b>V. homework:</b>


Learn the new words by heart


Read the text seval time and answer the Qs
under the text


<b>V.Comment:</b>


.


Ss. copy


Ss. rub out and remember
T. plays the cassette


T. asks Ss to read the text silently


T. asks Ss to read the text and check their prediction
Ss. do the Ex by reading silently


Ss. read the text again , then correct the Ex in groups.
1 - false 2 - true 3 - false 4-false 5-true


6-false 7-true 8-true 9-true
Ss. answer the Qs in pairs.



- It is 60 kilometers to the north of Hanoi
- Ba and his family got to the village by bus.
- It is at the entranceto the village


- They saw the shrine of Vietnamese hero on the
mountain


- They had a picnic on the river bank.


- Liz took a lot of photos to show the trip to her parents.
- She wishes she could visit Ba’village again


- _ Hotel


Ss. Do at home.


Planning day:
Teaching day:
Period 16
:




unit 3: a trip to the countryside



<b>lesson2 : speak + listen</b>


<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask and answer about the homevillage. Talk about


the countryside


Listen and match the places on the bus route with the letters on the map .


<b>B: Language contents:</b>


<i>- Vocab:</i> (review)
<i>- Structure</i>:


How long...? how far...? how...?


<b>c: teaching aids :</b>


pictures , flashcards , extraboard , textbook, real things


<b> </b>


<b> d </b> :procedure


<b>I. Check the old lesson</b>


T. asks Ss some questions about the content of
the last lesson


<b> II. Warm up</b>


WH- question : -what
- ………


<b> III. speak</b>


<b> 1 .Pre- speaking:</b>


<i>Questions</i>: ( on the extra board)


Ss. answer the T’questions
Ss. play a game “Networds”
T. ask Ss to discuss about qs.


Ss. Ans the qs after checking with partner.
Eg. a, My home village is Dan Ha.


<b>Country</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(26)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=26>

a, Where is your homevillage ?
b, How far is it from the city ?
c, how can you get the?


d, How long does it take to get there ?
e, What do people do for a living in your
village ?


f, Does your village have a river ?


<b>2.while speaking</b>


<i>* Model</i>: ( control speaking)


<i>* Free speaking</i>:


+ Where is your home village?


It’s to the west of the town .


<i>* More informations</i>: Village fair, relatives,
children’s game…….


<b>3.post speaking</b>


Talk about your home village.


Ex: I live in a village to the……….of the town.
We plant rice, vegetable and raise


cattles……….


<b> IV. listen:</b>


<b>1 Pre- listening</b>


Play a game “rub out and remember”
1. airport


2. gas station
3. pond


4. highway number one
5. banyan tree


6. store


7. bamboo forest


8. dragon bridge
9. parking lot


<b>2 While- listening:</b>


Listen to the tape and match the words of
places in to the position on the map


from C-> D -> E -> F -> G -> B -> H -> I - >
A.


C. high way No. 1
D: Dragon bridge
E: gas station
F: store
G: Pond
B: Airport


H: bamboo forest
I: parking lot
A: banyan tree


<b>3 .Post listening</b>


<i>Ex1:describe the way from Hoa Binh to Hanoi </i>


Ex 2:Noughts and crosses


airport gas station quiet



pond banyan tree fresh


store parking enjoyable




<b>V. </b>


<b> Summary</b>: Practice speaking about the
village/ home village.


<b>VI. home work </b>


Write a short passage about your country.




1st<sub>: ps ask and answer, other listen carefully</sub>


2nd<sub>: work in pairs</sub>


3rd<sub>: Do it out to check and correct.</sub>


Do about the real home village.
1st<sub>: Use the qs above</sub>


2nd<sub>: Work in pairs.</sub>


Ex: P1: How far ……..



P2: It’s ……….


P1: Do you usually play…………..?


P2: …………


3rd<sub>: Play out</sub>


Ss. Work with partner then speak out
T + other listen, guide & correct.


S1:…………..


T. makes clear the qs. “Rub out and remember”.
Ss.play the game on the blackboard.


T. sets a scene about the topic of the lesson by asking
Ss some Qs about


T. has Ss listen to the tape twice
Ss. Ans aloud in the class.
T. gives the answer key.


-After that Ss listen and draw the arrows on the way
to Ba’s village.


Ss.describe
-a banyan tree
-2 bamboo foorests
- a gas station



-green paddy field on both sides
-a pond


- lakes
-parking lot


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(27)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=27>



<b>VII.comment</b>


Ss. Do at home.


__________________________________


: Planning day:
Teaching day:
Period 17


Unit 3: a trip to the countryside



Lesson 4: read



<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- understand the content of the text
- know the countryside life in the USA



<b>b: language content:</b>


Vocab: (review); maize, feed, grocery store, part- time, corn
Struc: Prepositions of time and places


At, near by, in, on, on the left/ right, … …./ .


<b>c: teaching aids:</b>


Flashcards, extraboard, textbook, pictures of country life


<b>D: procedure</b>
<b>I.</b>


<b> warm up:</b>


<b>P</b>lay a game “matching”


<b>F</b>ind a pair of words to make a meaningful new
word: tree, paddy, bank, home, bamboo, field,
forest,


fresh, banyan, air river, village


<b>II . pre-reading </b>


<b>S</b>et a scence to present the text by asking about
theUSA’s country life


- Have you ever been to the USA?



- Do you know anything about this country?
-What do the USA farmers grow?


- What anmals do they raise?
-What do they usually eat?


-What do they often do on the weeekend?
New words: (pictures and words)


Maize = corn


- grocery store: cua hang tap hoa
- feed = look after


- part – time = 1/ 2 time
- hot dog: banh mi kep xuc xich


<b> III.while reading</b>


Read and do some Exs


Ex1: Match the words in column A with
the words or groups of words in column
B having the same meaning


A
- Maize
- Feed



- Grocery store
- Past-time
- Collect


Ex2: Answer the following Qs:


Read the text again, then answer the Qs
1. Where is the Parker’s farm?


2. How many children does he have?
3. What does Van do in the afternoon?
4. What do the whole family do on Sunday
afternoon?




T. asks Ss to find a pair of words to make a
meaningful new word: tree, paddy, bank, home,
bamboo, field, forest,


fresh, banyan, air river, village
Ss. match


- banyan tree


-T. sets a scence to present the text by
Ss. listen and answer the questions


Ss. Listen, repeat, read and write



Ss. read silently to do the Exs
Ex


T. asks Ss to give the answer
Ss. give the answer


B
1. Corn


2. give food to eat


3.Where people buy food and small things
4. Shorter or less than standard time
5. bring things together


T. asks Ss to read the text again, then answer the Qs
-It’s about 100 kilometers outside Columbus, Ohio.
-He has 2


-He feed chicken and collect eggs.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(28)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=28>

<b>iV.</b>


<b> post reading : </b>


Ex1. Complete the summary:


Ex 2: Retell about Van.
<b>V. homework:</b>



- Learn the summary by heart


<b> VI. Comment:</b>




Ss. read the text again and summary in groups:
1. Ohio


2. Farmer


3. Work past time at a grocery store
4. Peter


5. Sam
6. After
7. Farm
8. They watch
9. Baseball


Some excellent Ss retell aloud in the class


Planning day:
Teaching day:
Period: 18


:



unit 3:a trip to the countryside



<b>lesson5: write</b>



<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to


- write simple sentences using the given words


- write a passage to retell their last picnic to the countyside


<b>B: language content:</b>


Cocab: blanket, blind man’s bluff ……(review).
Struc: past simple.


<b> C: teaching aids :</b>


flashcards , extraboard, textbook, pictures


<b>D :procedure</b>


<b> I: Check the old lesson</b>


Retell the content of the reading.


<b> II. Pre-writing : </b>


Answer the qs:



- Where did you spend your last vacation?
- What did you do there?


- Who did you go with?
Set a scene:


The pictures and some guides about “countryside
picnic”


New words


- pinic site


- lay out -- laid -- laid
- hurriedly


- put down
- blanket


Pictures and Some model sentences:


T. asks 2 Ss to retell the content of the reading.
Ss. retell.


T. asks Ss some Qs


Ss. answer the Qs.
T. sets a scene



T. shows the pictures and guide Ss to write simple
sentences to make a paragraph about “countryside
picnic”


T. presents some new words
Ss. Listen, repeat, read and write
Ss. do the T’require.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(29)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=29>

It was a beautiful day. My friends and I wanted to
go on a picnic...


Tense of these sentences?


Work in groups to do the Ex with each pictures


<b> III .While writing</b>


Write the passage


Work in groups to compare their writing


Choose the best passage to correct in front of the
class


<b> IV. Post writing : </b>


Correct the passage


Look at the picture and retell the story.
Take a survey.





<b>V.</b>
<b>home</b>
<b>work</b>


Write
a short


passage about your last visit or picnic .


<b>VI.comment:</b>


giving some model sentences:


T. asks Ss about the tense of these sentences, asks Ss
to work in groups to do the Ex with each pictures
Ss. rub out and remember.


Ss. Look at the pictures and do ex
T. asks Ss to write the passage


T. asks SS to work in groups to compare their writing
then choose the best passage to correct in front of
the class


T. helps Ss to correct the passage


T. asks Ss to look at the picture and retell the story.


T. has Ss take a survey.


Ss. answer.


Ss. work in group


Ss. write


Planning day:
Teaching day:
Period: 19


Unit3: a trip to the countryside



<b>lesson6: language focus</b>



<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use the structures to do exs


<b>B: language content</b>:
- the prepositions of time
- modal verbs with “wish”
- adverb clauses of result


<b>c: teaching aids :</b>


extraboard , textbook


<b>d :procedure:</b>



<b>I. Warm up:</b>


Name out the modal verbs:


Can, may, might, could, would,…….


<b> II. Presentation+ practice</b>


<i>1. Modal verbs with wish</i>“ ”
An example:


Ba can’t swim.


He wishes he could swim.
Give comments:


Rewrite:


- I can’t speak English well.
- Nam can’t fly.


T.aks Ss to name the modal verbs
Ss. name: can,...


T. gives an example


T. asks Ss to give comments
Ss. give comments



T. gives some sentences and asks Ss to
rewrite.


<b>activities</b>
<b>name</b>


go fishing
1.You


2.Lan
3. ...


go sight-
seeing


Visit


grandparents


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(30)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=30>

T. asks Ss do Ex1 in text book.


<i>2. prepositions of time</i>


Read about Mr.Thanh’s itinerary and complete
the Ex2


Do Ex3: Complete the sentences with on, at, in,
for.


<i>3. Adverbial clause of result:</i>



Two simple sentences :
Hoa worked hard
She passed the exam


The relationship between 2 sentences , combine
them in to one with “so”


* Hoa worked hard, so she passed the exam.
Some pairs of sentences, combine them.
Do Ex4.


<b>III.Production:</b>


Choose the best answer.


1.They have lived in that house... several
months.


(in / at / for / since )


2.It rains heavily,... we can’t go to the
movies with you


(and / but / because / so )
3.He was born ....15 th ,January.
(in / of / at / on )


4.There is a meeting ... 9AM and 2PM.
(on / between / at / from)



5.Minh wishes he ... a new bike.
(would have / has / had / will have)


<b> IV.homework:</b>


<b> </b>


.


<b>V.comment</b>


Ss. read the itinerary then complete the Ex2
a. at


b. on
c. between
d. till
e. after
f. up to
Ss.do Ex3


a. on
b. at /in
c. in
d. for
e. in
f. at


T. writes two simple sentences on the board:


T. explains


Ss. give comments


Ss. pay attention to the example
T. gives some pairs of sentences and
asks Ss to combine.


T. lets Ss do Ex4
Ss. combine.


Ss.do the Ex4-matching.
1 - e


2 - a
3 - d
4 - b
5 - c


1. for
2. so
3. on
4. between
5. had


<b> L</b>earn the form of the structures by heart
and do the Ex in text book again.


<b> __________________________________________</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(31)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=31>

<b> </b>


Planning day:
Teaching day:
Period: 20


<b> </b>

<b>unit 4: learning a foreign language</b>



lesson1: getting started + listen and read



<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to :


-get the main way of learning foreign language
-know the direct and reported speech.


<b>B: teaching aids :</b>


Pictures, flashcards, extraboard, textbook, cassette


<b>c: language contents:</b>


<i>* vovabulary: </i>


Examiner,aspect,passage,exactly,attend,course,terrible


<i> * structure</i>


Reported questions



<b> D :procedure</b>


.


<b>I. Warm up:</b>


Some questions:


1. Can you speak(write,read,or listen) E well?
2. How long have you learned it?


3. Where are you learning ?
4. How do you learn English?


5. Have you ever watch an English program on
TV?


Read the list of Qs ingetting started. Then tick on
the things they do from the list.


<b> II . Presentation : </b>


Situation : Lan is talking to Paola about her
English oral exam which she has just attended
New words and new structure:


1.New words:
Examiner(n)
Aspect (n)



Aspect of learning English
Attend (v)


Exactly(adv)
Course(n)
Terrible(adj)
2. Structure:


Direct and reported Qs by giving example:
Eg1: “What is you name? ” she asked me.
-She asks me what my name was.


Eg2:“Do you speak any other languages?” she
asked me


- She asked me if I spoke any other languages.
T. has Ss listen the text twice.


<b> III .Practice : </b>


Practise the dialouge in pairs.
Some pairs read aloud


Read the dialouge silently to do Ex b in text book


<b> IV. Production </b>


Find in the text reported Qs for the direct ones in
the list.



Eg: What is your name?


T.asks Ss some questions
Ss.answer the T’s questions




T. asks Ss to read the list out Qs in getting started.
Then tick on the things they do from the list.
T. has Ss read their answers


T. explains


Ss. read the Qs in text book.
Ss. tick


T. gives situation


Ss.read aloud their answers.
T. presents


Ss. listen
Ss. copy


Ss. rub out and remember


T. explains


Ss listen and find out the differences between two


sentenses.


T. lets Ss practise the dialouge in pairs.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(32)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=32>

-She asked me what my name was


<b>V. homework:</b>


Ex2 in workbook


Read the dialouge again


<b> VI.Comment:</b>


T. has Ss find in the text reported Qs for the direct
ones in the list.


Ss. listen


Ss. practise in pairs
Ss. play the role of the dialouge


Ss. read silentlyto finish Ex in text book.
Ss. work in groups ,find and read aloud






______________________________________


Planning day:
Teaching day:
Period: 21


<b>unit 4: learning a foreign language</b>



<b>lesson 2 : speak</b>


<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to
- discuss about an English course


-persuare their friends to go to the school which they would like to go
-use some structures sentenses : I think….; Let’s…. ; Why don’t we…? ; I agree …; I
disagree…


<b>B: language contents:</b>


+ I think…….


What do you think….? Why don’t we……?


If we go to…………we can……… If we go to…………we can………
We should…… We should……


I agree / disagree because Let’s…………..
I don’t understand…….



<b>C: teaching aids :</b>


pictures ,flashcards ,extraboard , textbook,real things


<b>d :procedure:</b>


<b> I. Warm up</b>


The model sentenses which we often use to
give their offers


Eg: I think ….
I agree …


<b> II. Pre- speaking : </b>


The content of the lesson: Thu, Tam and Kim
havejust awarded a schoolarship of US$2000 to
attend an English language summer course
aboard. Read the
advertisement.


New words:
Dormitory
On campus
Reputation
Western culture


Beautiful scenery
Approximately



<b>III.While speaking </b>


Work in groups of three to discuss and
persuade friends to go to the school which
they would like.


<b> </b>


T. has Ss give the model sentenses which they
often use to give their offers


Ss. give the model sentenses


T. presents
Ss. listen


T. asks Ss to read the advertisement
T. presents new words


Ss. read the advertisement
Ss. copy


Ss. practise pronunciation


T. asks Ss to work in groups of three to discuss
and persuade their friends to go to the school
which they would like.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(33)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=33>

<b> V. Post speaking</b>


Act out one of three Ss that they’ve practised,
using the information of the school to make a
short paragraph about the school which they
would like to go


* role play:


<b>VI. home work </b>


Write a short passage about the school you
would like to attend




<b>VII.comment </b>


T. asks Ss to act out
T. asks Ss to act out .


Ss. work in groups of three to persuade their
friends to go to the school which they would
like.


Ss. play the role of Thu ,Tam and Kim in front
of the class.


Ss. make a short paragraph



Eg: Hi, every body. I’m Thu. I’m very glad to
tell you about the Brighton Language


Center.It’s in the UK.Ss who study here can
live in dormitory on campus so it’s a good
chance to mix up with Ss from different
country living in one room.The school has
excellent reputation and it’s one of the best
language school in the UK.


Planning day:
Teaching day:
Period: 22


unit 4: learning a foreign language



<b>lesson3: listen</b>



<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to


-know the content of the dialouge between Nga and her foreigner friend
-know Nga’s difficulties when she learns English


-compaire her difficulties with Vietnam’ones
- practise listening comprehension


<b>B: language contents :</b>



Please to meet you


- Bank, national bank / international bank
University


Improve, skill, problem
Usefull.


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


pictures , flashcards , extraboard , textbook, cassette


<b>d :procedure:</b>




<b>I.Warm up:</b>


Retell the school which they intended to study
a summer foreign language course.


<b> II. Pre-listening: </b>


Some Qs:


1. How long have you learned English?
2. Can you speak it fluently?


3. What aspect of learning English do you find
most difficult?



4. Do you like studying English?


*The content of the lesson :
New words


Predict the listening exercise.


T. has two Ss retell the school which they
intended to study a summer foreign language
course.


Ss. retell the school.


T. asks and Ss. answer the Qs


T. sets a scene to present the content of the
lesson
Ss.listen


T. presents new words


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(34)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=34>

<b> III .While listening : </b>


Listen to the tape twice


Check their prediction Ex
Correct the Ex



a) Nga’s studying english for her work.


b) She learned English at school and university.
c) She works for a national bank in Ha Noi.
d) She needs to improve her writing.


e) Her listening is excellent.


f) She hopes she can talk to people from all
over the world,and understand her favorite
English song.


<b> IV. Post listening</b>


Work in groups to discuss about these Qs
1. What aspect of learning English do/don’t
you like? Why/Why not?


2. Which skill(s) are you good at?
3. What can you do to improve your
listening/speaking/….skill?


<b>V.home work </b>


Sum up the information about Nga and her
English studying. summary the listening
<b>VI.comment</b>


Ss.listen twice


Ss.correct their Ex
a) true.


b) true.


c) false.She works for an international bank in
Ha Noi.


d) true.


e) false.Her listening is terrible.
f) true.


T. asks Ss to work in groups to discuss about
these Qs


Ss. work in groups.


Planning day:
Teaching day:
Period: 23


unit 4 : learning a foreign language



lesson4: read



<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to :



- understand the languages which are used for advertisement
- practise reading comprehension


- read three advertisements and choose a suitable one for Mr.Lam


<b> B: teaching aids :</b>


flashcards ,extraboard , textbook,pictures of country life
<b>c:procedure</b>


<b> </b>


<b> I .Warm up : </b>


Play a game “Chain game”


<b>II . Pre-reading </b>


Discuss some Qs.


- Have you ever read any advertisements about
English course ?


-What kind of information do you see in these
advertisement?


New words.
- beginner
- intermediat
- advanced class



- well-qualified teachers


<b> III.While reading</b>


listen once or twice
Do some Ex


Ex1: Note down information about the


Ss. play the game: name all the language in the
world.


Eg:


S1.I can speak English


S2.I can speak English and Chinese
S3. …..


T. has Ss practise in groups to discuss some Qs.
Ss. listen and answer the questions


T. present, Ss listen, repeat, copy


T. plays the casette once or twice
T. asks Ss to do some Ex


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(35)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=35>

English class from the advertisement.
Compare with their partners.



Read aloud the answer.


Ex2: Read the note Mr.Lam made.Then look at
the advertisement and choose suitable language
school for him.Give reasons for your choice.
Read the text again to choose a suitable school
for him


Compare with their partner.


Checks Ss’exercise by asking some Qs
1.What class time is Mr.Lam looking for?
2.What level does he want?


3.What does he want to start the course?
*With these information ,which is a suitable
language school for him?




<b> iV. Post reading :</b>


Two advertisements for summer English course
and asks Ss to choose the one which they want to
attend.


<i><b>English for children</b></i>


For children aged 12 to 15


Level fromstarters to fliers
Well-qualified teachers
36 hours over 8 or 12 weeks
Fee:250 000 Vietnam dong
Add:10 Thai Ha Street
Tel: 041 925378
<b>V. homework:</b>


- Learn by heart the new words


- Read again the reading and talk about the
suitable school for Mr.Lam


<b> VI.Comment:</b>




Ss. read silentlyto do the Ex


T. asks Ss to read aloud the answer.
Ss. compare.


Ss. read aloud the answer.


Ss. read the text again to choose a suitable school
for Mr.Lam.


Ss. compare with their partner
Ss. answer the Qs:



- early morning
- intermediate level


- late October/early November


T. asks, Ss answer: - Foreign Language Council is
the most suitable school for Mr.lam because it meets
all the requirements set out.


T. gives the advertisments


Ss. read the advertisements and choose one suitable
school for them and give reason.


<i><b>English fluency</b></i>


From beginners to advanced
49.5 hours over 11 weeks
(38*15 hours per week)


Available on Mon/Wed/ Fri or Tue/Thu/Sad.
Fee: US $.147


Add: 36 Hung Dao Street
Tel: 018 852840


Ss. do at home


Planning day:


Teaching day:
Period: 24


:


unit 4 : learning a foreign language



<b>lesson5: write</b>



<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to write an inquiry letter


<b> B: language contents</b>


- Form of a formal letter


- Write a letter to ask for information


<b>C: teaching aids :</b>


Flashcards ,extraboard , textbook


<b>d :procedure</b>
<b> </b>


<b> I. Warm up:</b>


Tell about the English class which Mr.Lam
wants to attend .



Qs: “If you have a chance to attend one of these
class, which school will you choose?


<b>II. Pre- writing</b>


Some Qs:<b> </b>


T. asks to tell about the English class
Ss. tell.


Ss. choose


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(36)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=36>

- How often do you write letter?
- Who do you write to?


- Have you ever written a letter of inquiry?
- What do people write it for?


The letter in text book
Read the letter.
Some phrase words


look forward to + Ving


T. asks Ss about the form of a letter and how
many parts there are in a letter
The outline


Read the outline silently



Find the introduction, request, further
information and conclusion in Mr.John
Robinson.


<b>III.While writing</b>


Choose one of the schools in 5 READ you want
to attend to improve your English .Write a letter
of inquiry to the institution using the outline.
T. asks Ss to present their letter on the board
T. and Ss correct
<b>IV. Post writing : </b>


T. asks Ss :“If you want to take a summer
English course, what information will you have
to know?


Rewrite them into formal way.
1. When does the course start?
- Could you tell me...?
2. What is the length of he course?
- I would like to know...
3. How much is the course?
- Can you tell me ...?


4. How many students are there in a class?
- Could you pleased tell me ...?


<b> V.home work </b>



Learn the outline of an inquiry letter
Write a leter of inquiry to the school which you
want to attend a summer English course


requesting for more information about the course
and fees


<b>VI.comment</b>




Ss. answer the Qs.
T. presents


Ss.read the letter.


Ss.answer


T. asks Ss read the outline silently
Ss. read the outline and find.


Ss.work in groups of four to complete the
letter.


Ss.write


T. asks some qs.


Ss. answer :the time ,the length


the fees...


Ss. rewrite


1. Could you tell me when the course starts?
2. I would like to know what the length of the
course is.


3. Can you tell me how much the course is?
4. Could you pleased tell me how many
students there are in a class?


Planning day:
Teaching day:
Period: 25
:


unit 4 : learning a foreign language



<b>lesson6: language focus</b>


<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to use some structures to do some exs


<b>B: language contents</b>:


- the conditional sentenses type I
- direct and reported speech :


+ here and now words in reported speech


+ reported questions.


<b>c: teaching aids :</b>


extraboard , textbook
<b>d: procedure:</b>


<b>I. Warm up:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(37)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=37>

<b> II. Presentation+ practice</b>


<i><b>1.conditional sentenses type I</b></i>


Make sentenses


Give comment for the underlined words
Form and use comments?


* <i><b>will</b></i> can be replace by the other model verbs


Complete Ex1 in text book


<i><b>2.Reported speech</b></i>


Review the way to change direct speech into reported
ones


Read and complete the table in text book(Ex2)
Compare with their partners



Read the answer in front of the class


<b>Ex3: reported sentenses</b>


Example:


“I’m happy to see you again”


(Aunt Xuan)
The way to change direct into reported
-Aunt Xuan said she <i>was</i> happy to see you
T. asks some Ss to write on the board


<b>Ex4:reported questions</b>


T asks Ss to find Yes/No question and Wh-question
* 2 questions


1.“Do you like music?
2.“How old are you?”


Change into reported question
1. She asked me if I liked music
2. She asked me how old I was <b> </b>
<b> Iii.homework:</b>


<b> - L</b>earn the way to transform direct speech into reported
speech .


-Do ex3 in work book


<b>IV.comment</b>


Ss. make sentenses


Eg. If you <b>work</b> hard, you <b>will earn</b> a
lot of money


Ss. give comments
Ss. replace


If you work hard, you <i><b>can</b></i> earn ...
<i><b>must</b></i>
<i><b> may</b></i>
<i><b> ...</b></i>


Ss. complete Ex1
Ss. review


Ss. read and complete the table in text
Ss. compare with their partners


Ss. read the answer in front of the class
T. explains


Ss. write then compare with their partner
Ss. find


Ss. do the ex
Ss. do at home



Planning day:
Teaching day:
Period: 26
:


<b>written test</b>

(

Time:45 minutes)


<b> A.aims : </b>


-Check Ss’knowledge from unit3 to unit 4


-Help Ss to consolidate vocabulary and structures


-T.has plan to help the bad Ss and change the best Ss group


<b>B. contents:</b>


<b>number one</b>


<b>I.Choose the best answer from A,B ,C or D(3 marks)</b>


1.If you want to lose your weight,you...eat too much sugar
A.might not B.mustn’t C.shouldn’t D. may
2.Minh wishes he ...have to clean all the windows
A.don’t B.doesn’t C.didn’t D. wasn’t
3.Liz took a lot of photos to show the trip ... her parents
A.for B.about C.to D.at


4.They are very busy these days,but they plan to have the trip ...June
A.in B.on C.at D.for



5.If you ...to get well soon ,you must take this medicine.
A.will want B.wanted C.would want D.want
6.Hoa worked so hard, ... she passed her exam easily.
A.so B.because C.and D.if


<b>II.Rewrite the following sentenses(2 marks)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(38)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=38>

2. “Will you be free tomorrow?”


- I asked her...
3. “We are having a wonderful time here”,they said


-Theysaid ...


4. I cannot go fishing with my friends
-I wish...


<b> III.Find and correct the mistakes in the following sentenses ( 3 marks)</b>


1.We have not seen her for September. ...
2.My father asked me if I like English. ...
3.The children was so tired , so they sat down and had lunch. ...
<b> </b>4.My home village is on the west of the city. ...
5.I wish you will stop doing that. ...
6.She said she was interesing in learning foreign languages ...


<b>IV.Complete these sentenses ( 2 marks)</b>


1.I wish ...


2.If it is warm tomorrow,...
3.I am looking forward ...
4.If you want to improve your English ,...
1.They wish...
2.If you want to speak English well,...
3.It is very cold,so...
4.My home village is ...


<b>number two</b>


<b>I.Choose the best answer from A,B ,C or D(2marks)</b>


1.What do you usually wear ...the weekend
A.of B.on C.above D.about


2.The Parker family is very freindly,... Van enjoys being a member of
their family


A.that B.as C.so D.because
3.It’s very cold these days .I wish the temperature...higher
A.is B.will be C.were D.to be
4.She asked me ...she could come that day


A.if B.when C.about D.whenever
5.My mother will be in hanoi from Wednesday... Saturday
A.in B. on C. to D.up to
6.You can come ...you want.


A.so B. if C. because D.and



<b>II.Rewrite the following sentenses(2 marks)</b>


1. I can not go fishing with my parents.


- I wish ...
2. “I will be back tomorrow”,Nam said.


- Nam said ...
3.Do you speak any other languages,Mai?,the teacher said.


- The teacher asked...
4. I missed you ,so I phoned you quite often.


Because ...<b> III.Find and correct</b>
<b>the mistakes in these sentences( 3 marks)</b>


<b> </b>1.She have never been to Malaysia. ...
2.My home village is on the west of the city. ...
3.The children were very tired because they sat down and had lunch. ...
4.I wish you will stop doing that. ...
5.John asked me how long did it take me to get to his village. ...
6.Mai said she is a student in Vo Thi Sau Secondary School. ...


<b>IV.Complete these sentenses ( 2 marks)</b>


1.They wish...
2.If you want to speak English well,...
3.It is very cold,so...
4.My home village is ...
Planning day:



Teaching day:
Period: 27


<b>correct the written test</b>



<b>A: Airms: </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(39)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=39>

Ss.are be able to revew the lessons they have learned and remember the
lessons better


<b>b:content: Number one</b>


<b>I.choose the best answer from A, B, C, or D</b>


1. C 2.C 3.C 4. B 5.D 6.D


<b>II.rewrite the following sentenses:</b>


1. The teacher asked Tom what aspect of learning English he found most difficult.
2. I asked her if she would be free the following day.


3. They said they were having a wonderful time here.
4. I wish I could go fishing with my parents.


<b>III.Find and correct the mistakes </b>


1. for sinse
2. like liked
3. was were


4. on to


5. interesting interested


<b>IV.Complete these sentenses</b>


1. I wish + S + Ved/were...


2. If It is warm tomorrow ,+ Main clause
3.I am looking forward + to V-ing.


4. If you want to improve you English, + main clause.


<b>Number two</b>


<b>I.choose the best answer from A, B, C, or D</b>


1. B 2.C 3.C 4. A 5.D 6.B


<b>II.rewrite the following sentenses:</b>


1. I wish I could go fishing with my parents
2. Nam said he would be back the folowing day .


3. The teacher asked Mai if she spoke any other languages
4. Because I mised you ,I phoned you quite often.


<b>III.Find and correct the mistakes </b>


1. have has


2. on to
3. because so
4. will would
5. did it take it took


<b>IV.Complete these sentenses</b>


1. They wish + S + Ved/were...


2. If you want to speak English well,you +model verbs +V...
3. It is very so cold ,so + Adverbial clause of result.


4. My home village is + place


: Planning day:
Teaching day:
Period: 28


<b>unit5: the media</b>



<b>lesson1:getting started +listen and read</b>



<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to :
-get caqainted with the media topic
-ask and answer about the media.


<b>B: teaching aids :</b>



pictures ,flashcards ,extraboard , textbook,cassette


<b>c:language:</b>


<b>I.Vovabulary: </b>


crier, interactive, inexpensive, cooercial, incomebenefit, available.
<b>II.Structure</b>


Gerunds after some verbs


<b> D :procedure</b>


<b>I : Warm up.</b>


Play a game “cross word”


1.System for producing on screen visual images


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(40)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=40>

transmited with sound.


2.Transmission and repition of messages by
electric-magernetic waves without connecting waves.


3. An electronic machine for performing calculations
automatically.


<b> II. Getting started . </b>


What do you often do in your free time?



Look at the picture in text book and ans some Qs about
the picture :


What is he /she doing?
What are they using?
Practise 2 Qs in pairs.


<b>III .Listen and read </b>


<i><b>1.Presentation</b></i>


Presents the topic of the lesson then presents new words
- towm cries


- thanks to
- late-later-latest
- variety


- interactive
-remote cotrol
-benifit
-bring about
-informative


T.plays the cassette
<i><b>2.practice:</b></i>


Ex1:complete the table



fact and evens passage letter


1. Remote cotrol are used to
interact with TV


2.One of the most popular
magazines


3. People of different ages like
this magazine


4. Benifits of TV


5. People got the news from
town criers


6. Inteactive TV is available
now


D
...
...
...
...
...
Ex2: Answer the questions


1. What was a town crier?



2. how popular is the Kien Thuc Ngay Nay?


3. What benifits does the TV bring about to People’life?


<i><b>3. production</b></i>


4.What kinds of magazines and newspapers do you read?
5.What is your favourite type of media?


<b>III.homework:</b>


- learn the new words by heart


- Read the text several times and translate it in to
vietnamese.


<b>IV.Comment:</b>


2
3


4
.


T. asks Ss. answer the Qs
T. asks:


Ss. look at the picture and answer the Qs.
Ss. work in pairs :



A.Which of these is your favourite activity in
your free time? B.Watching TV.
A. How many hours a week do you spend
watching TV?


B.About 4 or 3 hours I guess.
T. presents


Ss. copy


Ss. practise with the new words


Ss. listen twice


Ss. read the text silently to do the Ex


1. D
2. B
3. B
4. C
5. A
6. D
-True




1. A town crier was a person whose job
walked through city street shouting the latest
news?



2. It is widely read by both teenagers and
adults


3. We can get the latest information


and enjoy interesting programes in
inexpensive and convenient way


4. I read ...
5. It is ...


: Planning day:
Teaching day:
Period: 29


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(41)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=41>

<b>lesson2: speak</b>


<b>A:objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to


- Express your idea using some verbs:like love enjoy,prefer
- Use tag questions in practising.


- speak about the programes on TV.


- listen and fill in the blanks with the missing dates and events
- know some information about the historical development of the media
- practise listening skill.



<b> B:teaching aids :</b>


flashcards ,extraboard , textbook,newspapers ,magazines


<b>c:language:</b>


1. New words: violent, documentary
2. Structure: Tag questions


<b>D:pr</b>ocedure


<b> I. W arm up:</b>


Play a game “Net words”


then present some new programes


<b> II. Speak</b>


<b> 1. Pre-speaking: </b>The dialogue.
New structure: tag question


-You like foreign films , don’t you ?


- She doesn’t enjoy watching sports ,does she?
The main parts of the structure.


Read the dialouge


<b>2 . While speaking </b>



Read the dialouge in pairs .


Use the programes on TV speaking about favourite
programes.


<b>3 . Post speaking</b>


Ex: Rearrange the given words to make sentenses.
1. don’t /watching/you/like/sports?


2. don’t /foreign films/you/do/you/like?
3. prefer/I/children’s to/corner/the new.
4. me/ documentaries /boring/seem/ to /quite.


<b>II. Listen</b>
<b> 1. Pre-listening: </b>


* true /false prediction


1. Chau is doing an assingnment.
2. The first printed newspaper appeared


3. Two newform of new media appeared in the early
20th century


4. Television became commercial viable in 1940s
5. The internet became a major forcev in journalism in
the mid and late 1990s.



<b>2 . While listening : </b>


Plays the cassette 2or 3times
- Check their prediction Ex
- Complete the Ex in text book.


When? What happened?


7th or 8th


century The first printed newspaper appeared in china
(a)... The telegraph was invented
early 20th


century Two new forms of news media appeared: (b) ...
(c)... Television became popular.
mid and


late1990s


(d) ....became a major force in
journalism.


<b> 3. Post listening : </b>


Answer the Qs about the media.


1. When did the first printed newspaper appeared?
2. When was the telegraph invented?



3. When did TV become popular


4. When did the internet become a major force in
journalism?


5. Name the two new forms of new media appeared in


Ss. play the game:


T.sets a scence to present the dialouge.
Ss.pay atention to the example


Ss. find the main parts
Ss. make sentenses


T. asks Ss to use the programes on TV
speaking about their favourite pro.
Ss. practise in pairs


Some pairs practise in front of the class
Ss. do the Ex.


Ss. discuss in groups to write two
questions for the last section of the
survey


T. asks Ss to do true /false prediction
Ss. listen


Ss. check their prediction


Ss. do the Ex


T.plays the cassette


- check the predictions then do the ex


a.The late 19th century.
b.Radio and newsreel.


c. In the 1950th.
d. the internet.


Ss. work in groups


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(42)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=42>

the early20th century
<b>V. home work </b>


- Learn by heart all the new words.


- Write 5 sentenses about the TV programes you like
<b>VI.comment</b>


Planning day:
Teaching day:
Period: 30


unit5: clothing



<b>lesson4: read</b>




<b>A: objectives : </b>


By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to :
- know the use of internet


- practise reading comprehention skill


- talk about the advantages and disadvantages of the internet


<b>B: teaching aids : </b>


flashcards ,extraboard , textbook, pictures , cassette.


<b>c: l. content:</b> deny(v), benefit(n), suffer(v), spam(n)


<b>D</b>


<b> :procedure</b>


.


<b>I. Warm up:</b>


Play a game “hang man”


<b> II . Pre-reading </b>


The picture and some Qs about the internet
-What are there in the picture?



- Do you know any thing about the internet?
- How often do you use the internet?


- What can you do with the internet?
What do you think about it?


Some new words: deny(v), benefit(n),suffer(v)spam(n)
T/F prediction exersice:


1. The internet is very fast and convinient way for
Sandra Morgan to get information


2. She can communicate with her friends on the
internet.


3. People in the city can’t easy to get access to the
internet .


4. Internet is very useful for our life.


<b> III.While reading</b>


Play the casette once or twice
Check their prediction Ex
Do some Ex


Read the text again answering the Qs
1. What is Sandra use the internet for?


2. Why is it uneasy for Honghoa to get access to the


internet?


3. According to huansui,why do people use the
internet?


4. make a lit of benefits of the internet according to the
three responses


5. Are there any disadvantages of the internet ? If so,
what are they?


<b>IV.production:</b>


6.Do you agrre or disagree with the responses?
7.What is your response to this forum?


<b> V. homework:</b>


- Answer the questions in the text book again.
-Translate the text in to Vietnamese


<b>VI.Comment</b><i><b>:</b></i><b> </b>


T. guides


Ss.play the game


T. presents the picture and asks Ss some Qs
about the internet



Ss. listen to the T.
Ss. answer the Qs


T. gives:


Ss. copy and practise pronunciation
Ss. predict


T. plays the casette and asks ss to check their
predictions


Ss. listen to the tape


Ss. read the text silentlyand check their
prediction.


1. She uses the internet to get information and
communicate with friends and relatives


2. because she live in the countryside where the
internet is unavailable.


3. They use the internet for education,
communication,enretainmentand commerce
4. Internet is used for many purposes.
5.Yes.There are some disadvantages: time
consuming,costly,dangerous.So,etimes users
have to suffer risks such as junk mail and
personal informationleaking.



Ss.answer


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(43)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=43>

Period 31


unit 5:the media



<b>lesson 5: write</b>


<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to
-Know the benefits of the internet


-Write a passage about the benefits of the internet using the suggestions


<b>B: teaching aids :</b>


flashcards ,extraboard , textbook


<b> </b>c :procedure


<b>I.warm up:</b>


Name the advantages of the internet.


<b> II. pre-writing:</b>


True false sentenses
1. We can deny the benefits of internet in our life


2. The internet is a very slow and unconvenient way to get


information?


3. We can check the weather condition through it before you
go on a picnic .


4. You can communicate with freinds or relatives on the other
side of the earth very quickly by e-mail or chatting.


5. There aren’t on line school for us to further our education
or self-study.


Read out the given cues in text book.
<b>III .while writing</b>


Write a passage about the benefits of the internet.
Compare the writing with others.


Correct in front of the class


<b> IV.post writing</b>


Do the excersise : Rearrange the following sentenses
“classification”


T. gives some words about “for or against”, about wearing
school uniform: equal, comfortable, self-confident, proud,
practical, colorful,


uniform, casual clothes, lively....
<b>V. home work </b>



Learn by heart the outline of two paragraph
Write the argument again


<b>VI.comment</b>


T. asks
Ss. name


- a mean of communication.
- getting information


- entertainment
- commerce
T.asks Ss to do


Ss. read the sentenses and do the Ex.


Ss. read the given cues in text book
T. asks Ss to write


Ss. write a passage in groups
T. chooses the best to correct
T. has Ss to do the excersise.


1. The internet is a plentiful and reliable
sourse of information


2. We can get information such as


news,articles,and weather forcastvery
fast.


3. The internet in a good way to
entertainment


4. We can listen to music ,watch video,
and play game on line.


Planning day:
Teaching day:
Period 32


<b>lesson6: language focus</b>



<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to
-use tag questions.


-use regund after some verbs.


<b>B: teaching aids : </b>


extraboard , textbook
c :procedure


<b>I. Check the old lesson</b>


Read the passage about the benefits of the internet.


<b>II . Presentation and practice</b>


<b>Action1: </b>Tag questions


Read the dialogue and find the tag questions.
Affirmative and nagative tag questions:
Affirmative tag question:


- You don’t like foreign films, do you?
- Lan can’t swim, can she?


- They didn’t go fishing last week ,did they?


T. presents nagative tag questions by asking Ss to chance
the affirmative ones into nagative


You like foregn films ,don’t you?
T.has Ss practise in text book


<i><b>Ex1:complete the following tag questions</b></i>


T. asks Ss to read their passage about the
benefits of the internet.


Ss. read their writing.


T. asks Ss to read the dialouge and find.
Ss. read the dialouge find


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(44)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=44>





Somespecial cases such as with “Let’s”, and request
Ex2: Look and practise in pairs:


Action 2: Regunds


T.presents and explains the use of regunds after some
verbs.


like
love
enjoy


hate +V-ing


dislike
suggest
avoid
...
Do the Ex:
Ex3:


Practise in pairs using the given words in the box
Ex4:


True sentenses about their relatives, friends ,... using
the given words


T. asks Ss to talk about their sentenses with friends


T. calls some Ss to write their sentenses on the board
<b>III .production:</b>


Find and correct the mistakes.


1. A new bridge will be built in Hoa Binh town,
wouldn’t it?


2. They invited you to the party last night, do they?
3. He hates to borrow money


4. I suggested go to King’s Pond.


<b> IV.homework:</b>


<b> - L</b>earn the form of the structures by heart.
- Do the Ex in work book


<b>V.comment:</b>


Ss.chance


T explains somespecial cases


Ss. do the Ex the compare with their partner
T.asks Ss to look at the table and practise in
pairs


T.presents and explains the use of regunds
after some verbs.



a. ..., haven’t you?
b. ..., didn’t he?
c. ..., do you?
d. ..., aren’t you?
T.asks Ss to do the Ex
Ss. work in pairs


T. lets Ss practise in pairs using the given
words in the box


T. calls some Ss to write


Ss. practise in pairs
Ss. write


Ss. talk with friends
Ss. write on the board
1. wouldn’t - won’t
2. do - didn’t
3. to borrow - borrowing
4. go - going


<b> </b>



Planning day:
Teaching day:
Period





<b>the first term revision </b>


<b>A: aims:</b>


- Help Ss to consolidate the knowledge from unit 1 to unit 5
- Help Ss review their lesson for the coming first term test
- Help Ss reveiw vocabulary and structure.


<b>B: teaching aids :</b>


extraboard , textbook


<b> </b>c :procedure


<b>I. Warm up</b>: play a game


T.gives a number of verbs and asks Ss to give the past and past
participle form


<b>II. presentation and practise</b>


<b>Ex1:</b> Fill in each blank with a suitable word.


1.They felt very tired , ...they sat down under the banyan tree
2.Wearing casual clothes makes students... self confident
when they were in their favourite clothes


3.Jack was very angry .She didn’t give me a chance ...
explaine.



4.We hace lived in this city ... 1995.


5.What aspect ...learning English do you find most difficult.


Ss. play the game.
Eg:


go - went - gone


Ss. do the Ex then compare with their
partner.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(45)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=45>

6.It’s time he ...the bus


7.When my father was young ,he ... to go fishing on Sundays
8.In Vietnam,children must go to school at 6 years odl.This
is ... education


9.Ba wishes he ...have a new bicycle.


10.You have read this article on the websit ,...?


<b>Ex2:</b> Rewrite the following sentenses using the given words
1.It’s a pity a can’t play the piano


- I wish...


2.They built the church in 18th century.
- The church ...



3.Someone has stolen my bike
- My bike ...


4.“Can you speak English?” Mr.Brown asked
- Mr.Brown asked me...


5.“What do you often do in your free time?”
- My teacher asked us...


Ex3:Choose the correct answer


1.I would rather she .... the work again
do / did / will do / to do


2.This test must be done ...


care / careful / carefully/ careless
3.We have well ... teachers


quality / qualified / qualification/
qualify


4.If you want to .... your English,we can help you.
improve / attend / take /


5.We’re looking forward to .... you
see/ saw / seen / seeing


<b>III .production:</b>



Find and correct the mistakes.


1.A new bridge will be built in Hoa Binh town, wouldn’t it?
2.They invited you to the party last night, do they?


3.He hates to borrow money
4. I suggested go to King’s Pond.


<b> IV.homework:</b>


<b> -L</b>earn the form of the structures by heart.
- Do the Ex in work book


<b>V.comment:</b>


5. of
6.catch
7.used


8.compulsory
9.could


10.haven’t you
Ss.rewite


1. I wish I could play the piano.


2. The church was built in 18 th century
3. My bike has been stolen



4. Mr.brown asks me if I could speak
English


5.My teacher asked me what I often did in
my free time.


Ss.do the Ex
1.did


2.carefully
3.qualified
4.improve
5.seeing


1. wouldn’t - won’t
2. do - didn’t
3. to borrow - borrowing
4. go - going


<b> </b>

Planning day:
Teaching day:
Period


<b>unit6: the environmemt</b>





<b> </b>

<b>lesson1: getting started +listen and read</b>






<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
-know the environmemt problems


-use new words about environmemt problems in the correct way.


- read the text for general and specific information through some kind of exercises.


<b> B: teaching aids :</b>


Pictures, flashcards, extra board, textbook, cassette
<b>c:procedure:</b>




<b>I. warm up.</b>


Play a game “Brainstorming”: Make a list of
people’s activities that destroy the environmemt
<b>II. getting started.</b>


The pictures in text book


Look at the pictures and asks match the pictures
with the given words.


<b>III .listen and read </b>



T. has Ss play


Ss. play the game in group of 3 or 4
Eg : -cut down trees


- throw garbage in public places
T. presents


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(46)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=46>

<i><b>1.presentation</b></i>


a) air polution


b) spraying pesticides
c) garbage dump
d) warter pollution
e) desforestation
f) dynamite fishing


<i><b>2.practice</b></i>


Read the text silently to check the prediction Ex,
then read the full sentences


Read the text again


Do the Ex b:Answer the questions in group
Compare with the other group.


1. Who is the speaker?
2. Who are the listeners?


3. Where are they?


4. What are they going to do?


5. What will they achieve if they work hard today?


<i><b> </b></i>


<i><b> 3. production </b></i>


Work in group of 3 or 4 and discuss questions 6& 7
in the book


6. Have you ever do any thing similar?
If yes, what did you do? Where did you do it?
7. If the polution continues,what might happen?


<b>IV. homework:</b>


learn the new words by heart
Read the text several times and
translate it in to vietnamese
Do Ex 2 in work book


<b>V.Comment:</b>


T. sets a scene to present the passage in the
book.



T. asks Ss to do prediction Exa in text
book.(using extra board)


T. presents new words
T has Ss listen to the text


T.asks Ss to read the text silently to check
the prediction Ex


T. calls on some Ss to read the full
sentences


Ss. predict


T. has Ss read the text again and do the ex,
check their prediction.


<b>Group 1</b>- f) walk along the shore


<b>Group 2</b>- e) check the sand.


<b>Group 3</b>- b) check among the rocks.


<b>Mr.Jones</b> - a) collect all the bags and take
them to the garbage dump.


<b>Mrs.Smith</b> - c) provided a picnic lunch for
everyone.


<b>Mr.Brown</b> - d) give out the bags


T. lets Ss work in group of 3 or 4 and
discuss questions 6&7 in the book
1. Mr.is the speaker


2. They are the members of volunteer
conservationists.


3. They are on the beach.


4. They are going to clear the beach.
5. If they work hard,they will make the
beach clean and beautiful again soon.
Ss. do at home.




Planning day:
Teaching day:
Period


<b>unit6: the environmemt</b>



<b>lesson2: speak</b>



<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to


- Persuade other people by using given expressions: I think you should....; Why not....; why
don’t you ... ?



- Give idea about protecting the environmemt


<b>B: teaching aids :</b>


Pictures , flashcards , extraboard , textbook.


<b> </b>c :procedure
<b>I. warm up:</b>


Play netword : Name the things we should or
shouldn’t do to protect the environmemt
<b>II. pre-speaking:</b>


* Pre-teach vocabulary
trash = garbage
garbage bin (n)
traffic jam (n)
exhaust fume (n)


- T. asks Ss to say some structures they often use to


T. has Ss play
Ss. name


eg: go to shool by bike


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(47)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=47>

persuade the other


- T asks Ss to read the persuading expressions



<b>III .while speaking </b>


T.asks Ss to practise in pairs, persuad their partner to do
the things to protect the environmemt


T. calls on some pairs to practise in front of the class
<b> </b>


<b> </b>


<b>IV.post speaking:</b>


Work in group and find the answers to the questionaire:


Express the answers.
<b>V. home work </b>


Answer the question :What can you do to protect the
environmemt


<b>VI.comment</b>


T. asks Ss to say some structures they often use to
persuade the other


eg: I think we should ...; Shall we...?
Ss. read the expressions



Ss. work in pair.


T. calls on some pairs to practise in front of the class
A: I think it would be better if we reuse and recycle
bootle and caans


B: Why? How to do?


A: Because reusing and recycling bottles can reduce
garbage and save natural resources


2: A: I think we shouldn’t throw trash onto water
B: Why? How come ?


A: Because it can keep the water clean. Polluted
water can directly to harm to people’s health and
kill fish


Ss. work in 4 groups


Girl: How can we use fewer plastic bags?
Gr2:...reduce water polution?
Gr3:... prevent littering?
Gr4:...reduce air pollution?
Ss. express.


Ss. do at home


Planning day:
Teaching day:


Period


<b>unit6: the environmemt</b>



<b>lesson3: listen</b>


<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to


- Complete the information notes about ocean pollution through a report


- Use new words in the right context by playingwords game arranging in different class
cativities.


<b>B: teaching aids :</b>


pictures, extraboard, textbook, cassette
<b>c :procedure</b>


<b>i.warm up</b>


The environmemtal problems.




<b>II.pre-listening:</b>


Do prediction exercise:


a. People pump raw sweage directly into the sea.



b. Every year ships drop about 16 million tons of garbage
into the sea.


c. Oil spills from ships do not kill marine life.
d. Factoriess let waste materials run into the rivers
e.Oil which is washed from the land does not pollute the
oceans.


<b>iii.while listening:</b>


Listen twice


Check the prediction


Listen to the third time to complete the note.


T. asks Ss to elicite the environmemtal
problems.


Ss. do elicitation
noise


Pollution air oceans
land lakes
water streams
rivers
seas
T. lets Ss do



Ss. read the given sentenses , then predict.


Ss. listen


Ss. check the prediction
Ss. complete the note


How the oceans polluted


Firstly: raw sewage is pump directly into the
sea.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(48)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=48>

<b>IV.POST LISTENING:</b>


Work in pairs, use the note as the outline and make a short
presentation on how the ocean is polluted


<b>VI.HOME WORK:</b>


Write about your last visit


<b>viI.comment</b>


Thirdly:Oil spills <b>come from ships at the</b>
<b>sea.</b>


Next:<b>Waste material come from factories.</b>


Finally :<b>Oil is washed from the land</b>



Ss. work in pair and can add more ideas of
their own in the presentation


Ss. do at home


Planning day:
Teaching day:
Period




<b>unit6: the environmemt</b>



<b>lesson 4: read</b>


<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the poem with some old English by
doing “<i>Match exercise</i> and <i>Answering question</i>”


<b>B: teaching aids :</b>


flashcards , extraboard , textbook, cassette


<b>c:procedure.</b>


<b>I.warm up:</b>


Work in pairs or groups to answer the following questions
about poetry.



1. Do you like poetry?
2. Do you often read poetry?
3. who is your favorite poet?


4. Have you ever read a poem in English
5. What is it ? Do you understand it
<b>I I.pre-reading</b>


Present the poem


Do Ex 1 by predict the meaning of the words
The new words


- End up (v) = finish
- second hand(a) = used/ old


- junk yard (n) a place to store rubbish and waste
- treasure (n) valuable/precious things


- stream (n) a flow of water
- foam(n) bät


nonsens (n) ThËt ngí ngÈn


T.has Ss practise pronunciation


<b>III .wh-reading</b>


T. plays the casette twice.



T. asks Ss to read the text silently


T. lets Ss correct their prediction




Ss.work in pair sasking and answering the
questions


T. sets a scence to present the poem
T. lets Ss do Ex 1


T. prsents


Ss. listen & predict
Ss. practise pronunciation


Ss. listen
Ss. read silently


Ss. check their prediction


A B


1.Junk yard
2.End up
3.Treasure
4.foam
5.Stream



c) a piece of land full of
rubbish


g) reach a state of


f). a row things forming a fence
e) mass of bubbles of air or gas.
d) a flow of water


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(49)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=49>

Ex2:Answer the questions


T.asks Ss to work in pair to answer the qs


1.According to the mother ,what will happen if the
pollution goes on?


2.Who does the mother think pollute the environmemt?
3.What happen to the boy if he keep on asking his mother
such question?


<b>IV.Post-reading</b>


Work in 5 groups answering question 4 , 5 ,and 6
4. Do you think the boy ’s questions is silly? Why or
Why ?


5. What does the poet want us to learn about keeping the
environmemt unpolluted?



6. What could you do in our school/house to minimize the
pollution?


<b>V. homewowk: </b>


- Translate the poem in to Vietnamese


- Write 5 sentenses about what we could to minimize
the pollution


<b> Vi .comment: </b>






6.Hedge
7.folk


b) people


Ss.work in pairs to answer the Qs


1. If the pollution goes on,the world will end up
like a second hand junk yard.


2. She thinks the other folk polute the
environmemt, except her and her son


3. If he keeps on asking his mother such questions


,his mother will take him home right away


Ss. group work


Ss. do at home


Planning day:
Teaching day:
Period


<b>unit6: the environmemt</b>



<b>lesson 5: write</b>



<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to


- Know the form of a complaint letter (S.C.R.A.P)


- Write a complaint letter with the right format and language


<b>B: teaching aids :</b>


flashcards , extraboard , textbook


<b>c :procedure</b>


<b>I: warm up:</b>



T. asks 2 Ss to discuss : What’s in a formal letter ?




<b> II. pre-writing: </b>


<b>Action1:</b> form of a complait letter<b> </b>


A complaint leter
* The aim of each part.


1. Situation - State the reason of writing.
2. Complication - Mention the problems
3. Resolution - Make a suggestion.
4. Action - Talk about future action.
5. Politeness - End the letter politely.


<b>Action2:</b> ordering the letter


Mr. Nhat’s letter, asks Ss to order the letter.


<b>Action3</b>: Guide writing
Read the situation in textbook


Ss. asks Ss to find the main information for the letter


Ss. work in group writing the main parts of a formal
letter on group board.


Answer



- Sender’s address
- Receive’s address
- Salutation


- Body
- Signature


T.asks Ss to read the main parts of a complaint leter
T. help Ss to understand the aim of each part.
Ss. read the form


Ss. listen
T. Present


Ss. read Mr.Nhat’s letter ,then order the letter using
the form S.C.R.A.P


Ss. ead the situation in textbook


Ss. find the main information for the letter
1. Situation:The problem of fish catching behind
my house


2. Complication: use electricity to catch fish
Fish : died , floated


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(50)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=50>

<b>III .while writing</b>


Write the letter



Compare with the other group
Correct the mistakes


<b> </b>


<b>iV.post speaking</b>


T. has each group present their letter on the board


<b>V. home work</b>


Write a letter to the authorities to complain about many
peole are not allowed the trafic rules these days.


<b>VI.comment</b>


3. Resolution: Local authorities should prohibite
and fine heavy anyone catching fish in this way.
4. Action:


- See good response from the local authorities.
- See the protection of environmemt from the local
authorities.


5. Politeness: Faithfully/Sincerly
(Signature/name)
Ss. write the letter on group board
Ss. compare with other group



Ss. look at the letter and give comment.
Ss. do on the class


Ss. do at home


Planning day:
Teaching day:
Period


<b>unit 6: the environmemt</b>



<b>lesson 6: language focus</b>



<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to


- Remember the use of adjective and adverb in correct way
- Revew the form of conditional sentenses type one


-Know the form of that clause and adverbial clause


<b>B: teaching aids :</b>


Extraboard , textbook


<b> </b>c :procedure


<b>I. warm up:</b>



T. has Ss play a game: <i>Jumbled word </i>


1.wols
2.sda
3.dogo
4.pahypi
5.termexe


<b>II. pre and practice:</b>


<b>Action1:</b> adverbs


Review the formation and use of adverbs of manner through
questions:


- How are adverbs formed?
- What do we use adverbs for?
Formation: adjective + ly = adverb
Change the adjective into adverbs


adjective adverb


Extreme
Good
Happy
Sad
Slow


Extremely
Well


Happily
Sadly
Slowly


T. has Ss play
1. slow


2. sad
3. good
4. happy
5. exteme
T.helps


Ss. review the formation


T. introduce the example by asking Ss to do
exercise 1 in text book .Change the adjective
into adverbs


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(51)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=51>

T. explain: We use adverbs of manner to modify the verb . It
usually goes after the main verb.


<b>Action2:</b> Revision of adverb clause of reason
He failed the exam. He is too lazy.


The relation between two clauces .The words expressing
clauses of reason:Because = as =since


Do Ex2



<b>Action3:</b> Adjective + that clause


Eg: I am pleased that you are working hard.
T asks Ss to explcit the structure


<b>S + be + adjective + that clause</b>


Complete the dialogues in the book.


Read the completed dialogues aloud in class


<b>Action4:</b> Conditional sentenses type one


The main form of 2 clauses :If clause and main clause
T. lets Ss do ex 4 in the book


Ex2:Lan and her friends are holdin a fairwell party for
Maryam.Write the pictures and the words in the box


<b>IV.homework: </b>


Learn the form and use of the structures
Make two sentenses using these structures


<b>V.comment</b>


T. gives out two clauses
Ss. do the Ex1


Ss. pay attention to the clauses



T. asks Ss to complete the dialogues in the
book.


T. asks Ss to read the completed dialogues
aloud in class


- He failed the exam <b>because/sinse/as </b>he is too
lazy


Ss. do Ex 2


Ss. somplete the ex


T. lets Ss do ex 4 in the book
Ss. read the completed dialogues


Ss. say the main form of 2 clauses :If clause
and main clause.


Ss.do the ex.




Planning day:
Teaching day:
Period





<b>unit7:saving energy</b>




<b> </b>

<b>lesson1:getting started +listen and read</b>





<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to :


- use the word and phrases relating to energy saving
- understand the dialogue and the way to saven energy
- know the importance of energy to our life.


<b> B: teaching aids :</b>


pictures ,flashcards ,extra board , textbook, cassette
<b>c:procedure:</b>




<b>I.warm up.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(52)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=52>

1.Tell me the thing that not only people but also
animals ,trees and plants need for their life?
2.What do we use water for ?


3. Do you save or waste water?


4.How do you save water/ energy?
<b>II. getting started.</b>


T.presents the pictures in text book
T.lets Ss look at the pictures and asks


Ss work in groups writing a list of the things the
family could do to save energy.


<b>III .listen and read </b>


<i><b>1.presentation</b></i>


T.sets a scene to present the the dialogue between
Mrs Mi and her neighbor,Mrs Ha.


T.presents new words
- plumber(n)


- enormous (adj) = big
- crack (n)


- dripping faucet (n)
- pipe (n):


T .presents new structure
suggest+Ving


eg: I suggest taking shower
T.has Ss listen to the dialogue


<i><b>2.practice</b></i>


T.asks Ss to practise the dialogue in pairs
T.has Ss do the exercise true /false in groups


<i><b> </b></i>


<i><b> 3. production </b></i>


T.asks Ss some questions about the content of the
dialogue


a.What’s the matter with Mrs.Ha ?
b.How much is her water bill?


c.What does Mrs.Mi advise Mrs.Ha to
d.what exactly does she say?


e.What comes after suggestion?


f.How do you say this sentense in Vietnamese?
<b>IV. homework:</b>


learn the new words by heart


Read the text several times and translate it in
to vietnamese


Write 5 sentenses about how to save energy
<b>V.Comment:</b>



1.It is water.


2 we use it for drinking ,bathing,
producing...


Ss.look at the pictures


Ss.write the list of the things the family
could do to save energy


Ss.copy and make sentenses.


Ss.listen


Ss.practise the dialogue in pairs
Ss.do the exercise


1.true
2.true


3.false.(Mrs.ha hasn’t checked the pipes yet
4.false.(Mrs.Ha suggests taking showers
5.false


Ss.answer the questions in pairs


Planning day:
Teaching day:
Period



unit7:saving energy



lesson2: speak


<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to underdtand the suggestions to suggest ways to
save energy through group discussion


<b>B: teaching aids :</b>


pictures ,flashcards ,extraboard , textbook.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(53)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=53>

T.has Ss play “whispering” game


T.dervide the class into 2 teams :A and B
.And line up the players


T.asks Ss to whisper the message to the next
player in his group


The message


<i>Every body must save energy by turning off</i>
<i>the light when unnecessary</i>.


<b>II. pre-speaking:</b>


T.has Ss review the way to make suggestion


and responsse





<b>III .while speaking </b>


T.asks Ss touse the the expressions above
and pictures to make suggestion about how
to save energy




<b> IV.post speaking:</b>


T.has Ss work in groups ,using the
suggestions to work action plan to save
energy for your class


<b>V. home work </b>


Write your suggestions to you friends
about.


- How to save energy
- How to be a good student


Ss.play the game


Ss.introduce themselves



Ss.say the suggestion
1.I think we should ...
2. I suggest + ving ...
3.Shall we ...?
4.Why don’t we ...?
5.How about +Ving ...?
6.What about + ving ...?
7.Let’s ...
Ss. asy the responses
-Ok


-That’s a good idea
- All right


- No.I don’t want to ...
- I prefer to ...
- let’s...
Ss.work in pairs


a.I think we should turn off the faucet
b.Why don’t we turning off the gas
cooker


c.I suggest turning off the electric fan


d.I think we should turn off the air conditioner
when noone in the room


e.Why don;t wee turning off the TV When


Nobody is watching it


f.I think we shouldn’t go to school by motor
g.Let’s go to shool by bus or bicycle instead of
motor


Ss.work in group making suggestion
Eg:


A.I think we should turn off the lights
B.That ‘s a good idea


C.What about going to school on foot?
D.Great .Let’s walk to school every day


Planning day:
Teaching day:
Period


<b>unit7 : saving energy</b>



<b>lesson3: listen</b>


<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to


- understand and know how to do commen listening tasks:true or false
and gap fillingchoose the right pictures


- get general knowledge about one kind of alternative energy:solar energy


<b>B: teaching aids :</b>


pictures ,extraboard , textbook,cassette
<b>c :procedure</b>


<b>i.warm up</b>


T.asks Ss some Qs:


 What is energy?


 What is solar energy?


 What is the advantages of solar energy?


 Is solar energy appearedWhat did you eat
and where?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(54)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=54>

 Is solar energy appeared in Hoabinh?


<b>II.pre-listening:</b>


1.Preteach vocabulary
- Solar =belong to the sun


- solar energy =energy from the sun
- Nuclear power


- Solar panels
- Advaced


- roof


2.Checking tecking techniccque
Rub out and remember


T.write all the new words on the boardin two
colunmsEnglish and Vietnameseequivalence
3.True or false prediction


Ex a in text book.


<b>iii.while listening:</b>


T.has Ss listen twice


T.lets Ss check their prediction
T.gets the answer from Ss.


T.asks Ss to do Ex b gap filling


T.has Ss listen one more time to complete the
sentenses


<b>IV.POST LISTENING:</b>


True or false repeatation


T reads from 5 to 7 statements about content of
the listening:If the sentenses are true Ss. repeat ;If
the sentensesn are false Ss. keep silent



<b>VI.HOME WORK:</b>


Say the use of the solar energy.


<b>viI.comment</b>


Ss.copy.


Ss.guess the meaning


Ss.predict
Ss.listen


Ss.check their prediction
1.true


2.false ( Most of uor electricity comes from
the use of coal,gas,oil,or nuclear power)
3.False ( It is enough to provide power for
total population


4.true


5.false(...in 2015)
Ss.do ex:gap filling
1.effective


2.pollution
3.countries


4.store
5.roof


Ss.retell.


Planning day:
Teaching day:
Period


unit7: saving energy

<b> </b>


<b> lesson 4: read</b>



<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to:


- get general idea of the reading through choosing the best summary and answering
questions


- get knowledge about how to save energy


<b>B: teaching aids :</b>


flashcards ,extraboard , textbook, cassette.


<b>c:procedure.</b>


<b>I.warm up:</b>


T.let Ss play a game



T.prepare a two column table with yes -no questions and
name


T.lets Ss go aruond the class and ask other ss what they
usually do to save energy.If the answwer is Yes ,write




</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(55)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=55>

his /her name in the table.


The winner is the first one who complete the name
column.


Do you usualy name


Turn off the light when it is not
necessary?


Go to school by bus?


Put gargage into the dust bin?
Use leave to wrap food?


...
...
...
...



<b>II.pre-reading </b>


1.Vocabulary
- luxury
ccconsumer
household =family
account for


tumble drier
innovation


T.has Ss listen to the text


<b> III .wh-reading</b>


1.Scanning and skimming


T.asks Ss to read the text silently then answer the given
questions


a.Which contiments are mentioned in the text?


b.Are electicity ,gas,and water luxuries or necessities?
2.Choose the best summary


T.asks Ss to read the text.


T.lets Ss correct Ex1:Prediction Ex2:True or
False



T.uses extra board
<b>IV.Post-reading</b>


Match the name of the capitals with appropriate
countries:


1.Vietnam Hanoi


2.Malaysia ………..


3.Singapore ………..


4.Indonesia ……….. .


5.Philipines ………


6.Lao ……….
7.Cambodia ………
8.Myanmar ………


9.Thailand ………


10.Brunei ……….


<b> V.homewowk: </b>


speak about one of <b>ASEAN</b> countries


<b> Vi .comment: </b>






Ss.copy


Ss.guess the meaning of the new words


Ss.listen


Ss.read the text silently
Ss.answer the questions


Ss.read the sentenses and choose the best
summery for the passage


Ss. do individual then check with the partner. then
check and correct in the class.


Planning day:
Teaching day:
Period


<b>lesson6: language focus</b>


<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to
-use the present ferfect tense


-review the passive form


<b>B: teaching aids : </b>


extraboard , textbook


<b> </b>c :procedure


<b>I. warm up:</b>


T.gives a sery of verbs


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(56)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=56>

<b>II. presentation:</b>


<b>Action1:</b>The present perfect tense


T.asks Ss to retell the form and use of the tense


T.lets Ss do Ex1(page 19)


T.asks Ss to find out the present perfect tense and
the prepositions


T.has Ss practise the Dialogue in pairs
T.lets Ss do Ex2 ,Ex3


Action2: Passive form


T.asks Ss to say the form of passive sentenses
T.has Ss do Ex4(21)


Ex4: change in to passive



a.They made jean cloth completely from cotton
in the 18th century.


b.They grow rice in tropical contries.
c.They will produce five million bottles of
champagne in France next year.


d.Theyhave just introduced a new style of jeans
in the USA.


e.They have built two department stores this year
Ex 5:Change in to passive


a.We can solve the problem


b.People should stop experiments on animals
c.We might find life on another planet


d.we have to improve all the schools in the city
e.They are going to build a new bridge in the area


- ...


<b>III .production:</b>


Rewrite the following sentenses using the given
words



1.A new bridge will be built in Hoa Binh town
-They ...


2.They invited me to the party last night
-I ...


3.Jeans was made in the USA
-They ...


4. We should give children a good aducation at
school.


-Children ...


<b>IV.homework:</b>


<b> -L</b>earn the form of the structures by heart
- Do the Ex again.


<b>V.comment:</b>


Eg: gone,came,done,eaten,met, ....
Ss.retell the form


S + have/has Pastparticiple
Ss.say the use:


-để diễn đạt hành động xảy ra trong quá khứ
mà không rõ thời gian



-diễn đạt hành động xảy ra trong quá khứ mà
còn kéo dài đến hiện tại...


Ss.do Ex 1


Ss.find uot the present ferfect sentenses and
the prepositions


Ss.practise in pairs to make similar dialogue
Ss.work in pair


Ss.review the form of passive form.
Be = past participle


a.Jean cloth was made completelyfrom cotton
in the 18th century


b.Rice is grown in tropical contries


c.Five milion bottles of champagne will be
produced in France next year


d.A new style of jeans has just been
introduced in the USA


e.Two department stores have been built this
year


a.The problem can be solved



b.Experiments on animals should be stopped
c.Liffe might be found on another planet.
d. all the schools in the city have to be
improved


e.A new bridge is going to be built in the
area.


-They will build a new bridge in Hoa Binh
town


-I was invited to the party last night
-They made jeans in the USA


- Children should be given a good aducation
at school


Plan: Period: 13
Teach:


<b>Ôn tập kiểm tra 1 tiết</b>



<b>a.aims</b>


- Help Ss to review vocabulary and grammar structure from unit 1 to unit 2 by doing some kinds
of Ex


- Check Ss’ understanding to prepare for the written test.
b.procedure



<b> I.warm up:</b>


T.lets Ss play a game
T.give a number of verbs
Eg go


see
….


Ss. change these verbs into past and past
particible


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(57)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=57>

<b>II.presentation + practice</b>


<b>Ex1:</b><i><b>Read the first sentences,and then complete the</b></i>
<i><b>second sentences with the same meaning</b></i>


1.They produce champagne in France.
2.People don’t use this dictionary very often.
3.They have found oil in the Antarctic.
4.We must finish the project on time .


5.they had to canael the flight because of the bad
weather .


6.They ought to knock down the old building.


<i><b>Ex2.Match</b></i>


1.The Mona Lisa was painted by ...


2.Hamlet was written by ...


3.The television was invented by...


4. The moonlight Sonata was composed by...
5.Radium was discovered by ...


6.the telephone was invented by ...


<b>Ex3:</b><i><b> Complete the questions about John</b></i> Brown:
eg1 :<b>What does he do?</b>


<b> </b>He is a lecturer


1 What...?
He is a lecture


2.When...?
In 1982


3.How long ... ..?
Since 1990


4.How many...?
Five


5...he ever...a book about
disable children?


6.Who(m)...?


Linda, his assistant.


7.How many ...?
Two


8.Where...?
In the center of the city


9.When...?
In the 1980s


10.How long ...?
Since 2002


<b>III. Homework</b>


Review the grammar and vocabulary
Prepare carefully for the written test


<b> IV.Comments</b>


1. champagne is produced in
France.


2. This dictionary isn’t used very
often .


3. Oil has been found in the
attarctic.



4. the project must be finished on
time.


5. The flight had to be canceld
because of the bad weather.
6. the old building ought to be


knocked down.
a.Alexander Bell
b.William Shakespeare
c.Marie curie


d. leonardo da Vinci
e.Ludwig Van Bethoven
f.John Logie Braird
Key:1- d 3- f 5- c
2- b 4- e 6- a


What does he do?


When did he start his work?
How long have he been married?
How many books did he write?
Have ...he?


Who is he married?


How many children does he have?
Where does he live?



Plan:


Period 14
Teach:


<b>written test</b>



Time:45 minutes


<b> A.aims : </b>


-Check Ss’knowledge from2 begining unites
-Definite Ss through their test


-T.has plan to help the bad Ss and change the best Ss group


<b>B. contents:</b>


<b> Number one</b>


<b> I. Choose the best answer from A,B ,C or D(2marks)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(58)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=58>

A.in B.for C.since D.at


2.Vietnamese women usually the ao dai ,...on important celebrations
A. special B specially C. especial D. especially


3.Young peaple are fond of ...jeans


A.to wear B. wearing C .to wore D.worn


4.The USA has a...of around 250 million


A.population B.separation C. addition D introduction


<b>II Rewrite the following sentenses(3 marks)</b>


2. They will build a new bridge in Hoa Binh province.
- A new bridge...


2. I have a penpal in Hanoi but I have never visited her.
-I wish...
3.We can’t do this test quickly.


-This test ...
4.Did Peter buy a new house yesterday?


-Was...?


<b> III Give the correct verb form(3macks</b>)
1 .I (speak )...to him last Sunday.


2.Lan (invite) ...to my birthday party two days ago
3.Mai wishes she (be)...a lecture.


4.Jim (lose)... his bike sinse last month


<b> IV.Complete the passage using the given words:</b>


<i><b>(look, from,other,from,wore,colorful,cloth ,about)</b></i>



Clothes can tell a lot ...(1) a person.Some peole like very colorful clothes because they
want evryone to ...(2) at them and they want to be the centre of thing. ...(3)peole like to
wear nice clothes ,but their clothes are not ...(4) or fancy.They do not like people to look at
them .Clothes today are very different...(5)the clothes of the 1800s.One difference is the way
they look.For example ,in 1800s,all women ...(6) dress.The dress all had long skirt.But today
women do not usually wear dresses with long skirt.Sometime they wear short skirts.Sometimes
they wear short skirts.Sometimes they wear pants .Another difference between 1800s and today is
the ...(7) .In 1800s,clothes were made only from natural kinds of cloth.They were made
from cotton ,wood silk,or linen.But today,there are many kinds of manmade cloth.A lot of clothes
are now made ...(8) nynon.rayonor polyester.


<b> </b>


<b> Number two</b>


<b> I. Choose the best answer from A,B ,C or D(2marks)</b>


1.We were impressed by the ...of Hoa Binh people.


A.friend B.friendly C.friendship D.friendliness
2.Vietnamese women usually wear modern clothing ...work.


A. at B.in C. on D.during
3.Sales of jeans ... up and up in 1980s


A.to go B.go C .went D.gone
4.Vietnam is a ... of ASEAN


A.population B.country C.nation D.member



<b>II.Rewrite the following sentenses(2 marks)</b>


1.They are going to grow flowers in the garden.
- Flowers ...
2. I can not go fishing with my parents.


- I wish ...
3.We must finish this work on time


- This work ...
4.Did people make jeans two hundred years ago
- Were ...?


<b> III.Give the correct verb form(2marks</b>)


1.He is a fashion designer . He loves (design)... clothes
2.I (invite) ...Lan to my birthday party two days ago
3.Mai wishes she (have)...a brother.


4.I (not see)...my father since my birthday


<b>IV.Find and correct the mistakes in these sentences( 2 marks)</b>


1.I wish I can speak Chinese fluently.


...
2.Rice are grown in Vietnam .


...
3.A new road is going to build in Hoa Binh town.


...


<b> </b>4.She have never been to Malaysia.


...


<b>V.Complete the passage using the given words:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(59)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=59>

<i><b> </b></i> Clothes can tell a lot ...(1) a person.Some peole like very colorful clothes because they
want everyone to ...(2) at them and they want to be the centre of thing. ...(3)peole like
to wear nice clothes ,but their clothes are not ...(4) or fancy.They do not like people to look
at them .Clothes today are very different...(5)the clothes of the 1800s.One difference is the
way they look.For example ,in 1800s,all women ...(6) dress.The dress all had long skirt.But
today women do not usually wear dresses with long skirt.Sometimes they wear short


skirts..Sometimes they wear pants.


Another difference between 1800s and today is the ...(7) .In 1800s,clothes were made
only from natural kinds of cloth.They were made from cotton ,wood ,silk,or linen.But today,there
are many kinds of manmade cloth.


A lot of clothes are now made ...(8) nynon,rayon or polyester.


<b>C .comments </b>


Exellent: ... %... Everage: ... % ...
Good : ... %... Bad: ... %...


Plan: Period:50
Teach:



<i>unit8: celebrations</i>



lesson1:getting started +listen and read


<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to :


- get more information about celebrations in Vietnam and in the world


- know the cativities people often do on the Passover and Easter,compare with Vietnamese
traditional celebration ,the Lunar New year.


<b> B: teaching aids :</b>


pictures ,flashcards ,extraboard , textbook


<b>c:language:</b>


<b>I: vovabulary: </b>


occur , decorate , celebrate , celebration , slavery , ancient , joyful , freedom , sticky
Passover ,Easter, lunar .




<b>II structure</b>


Relative clauses with <i><b>who and which</b></i>



<b> </b>D :procedure


<b>I. getting started.</b>


T.asks Ss to work in four group


T.stick some pictures about celebrations on the
board and the flashcards written the names of these
celebrations


<b>II .listen and read </b>


T.sets a scence by asking Ss some questions about
the Lunar New Year


<b> 1.Presetation</b>


a.<i><b>Vocabulary</b></i>


- occur = happen
- sticky (adj) dính
sticky rice cake
- slavery( n) chế độ nô lệ
freedom from slavery
- ancient = old


- joyful = cheerful
T.plays the cassette



<i><b>b.Structure:Relative clause</b></i>


- Tet is a festival which occurs in late January or
early February


- Family member who live apart ty to be together
at Tet


<b>2.Practise</b>


T.has Ss listen to the test twice


T.lets Ss read the test silently and find the other
relative clauses


Ss.play the game in group


Ss.match the pictures with the name of the
celebrations.


Ss.listen and answer the questions


Ss.make sentences


Ss.listen


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(60)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=60>

T.asks Ss.to read the test aloud


T.asks Ss to work in groups to complete the table in
text book



<b>3. Production </b>


T.asks Ss to speak about their recent Tet’s
celebration


<b> II.homework:</b>


Speak about your most recent Tet’s celebration
Read the text several times and translate it in to
vietnamese.


<b>IV.Comment:</b>


relative clauses
Ss.read the test aloud


Ss.work in groups to complete the table
Ss.speak about the recent Tet’s celebration


Plan: Period:51
Teach:


<i>unit8: celebrations</i>


<b>lesson2: speak</b>



<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to give and respond to a compliment for common
situation



<b>B: teaching aids :</b>


pictures ,flashcards ,extraboard , textbook


<b> </b>c :procedure


<b>I. warm up: </b>Question and answer
T.asks


- When do people give complement to the other?
- Do you usually give a complimemt?


- On which occasion ? To whom ?
- Do you know how to respond it?


<b>II. pre-speaking:</b>


1.Vocabulary


- contest = copetition
- take part in = join in


- charity program / activities :hoạt động từ thiện
- active(n) năng động


- activist (n) ngời năng động
- nominate(v)= appoint
2.Structure



T.introduces the structures to give and respond to a
compliment


<b>Give a compliment</b>


- Well done


- That’s a great / an excellent ...
- Let me congratulate you on ...
<b>Respond to a compliment</b>


- Thanks


- It’s nice of you to say so .
- That’s very kind of you
<b>III .while speaking </b>


T.gives situations and asks Ss to make and respond
to the compliment


T.asks Ss to work in pairs practising using the
given situations in text book


<b> IV.post speaking</b>


T.asks Ss to think of the situations in which they
can give compliment to friends or respond from
them


<b>V. home work </b>



Think about 3 situations in which you give
compliments to your friends or relatives
<b>VI.comment</b>


Ss.answer




Ss.make sentences


Ss.make and respond to the compliment
Ss.practise in pairs


Ss.Work in pairs
Eg:


Nam: Let me congratulate you on
your graduation


Minh: That’s very kind of you


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(61)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=61>

Teach:


<i>unit8: celebrations</i>



<b> </b>

<b>lesson3: listen</b>



<b>A: objectives: </b>



By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to complete a song by filling the missing words and
up date themselves with the information about one of the best known songs in English speaking
countries.


<b>B: teaching aids :</b>


pictures ,flashcards ,extraboard , textbook,cassette


<b>c :procedure</b>


<b>I warm up:</b>


T.has Ss play a game :
“ Brainstorming”


T.asks Ss to work in group ,making a list of things that
people often do on the New Year’s Eve.


<b>II. pre-listening:</b>


T.presents new words
- acquaintance ( n)


- bring to mind = remember
- kindness(n)


- trusty ( adj)


* Check vocabulary : Matching
1.Acquaintance



2.Bring to mind
3.Kindness


4.Trusty a.Trust worth


b.a person you know
c.remember


d.being kind to others


T.asks Ss to read the song and predict the missing
words


<b>III .while listening:</b>


T.plays the cassette 2or 3times
T.gets the answers from Ss
T.gives the answer key.


<b> </b>


T.has Ss sing the song .


T.uses extra board to give the translation of the
original Scots version into standard English.


<b> IV.post listening:</b>


T.asks Ss to work in groups to discuss what they and


their family member do on New Year ’s Eve


<b>V. home work: </b>


- learn the song by heart.
- Sing the song.


<b>VI.comment:</b>


Ss.gather in group to discuss
- holding parties


- dancing
- drinking
- singing


- ...
Ss. listen, repeat, read and coppy to the
notebooks.


Ss.match


Ss.read the test and guess
Ss.listen


Ss.check their prediction
Ss.give out their answer


a.day b.take c.mind
d.hand e.kindness



Ss.sing the song
Ss.listen


Plan: Period:53
Teach:




<i>unit8: celebrations</i>


lesson4: read



<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to know more one of the important celebrations in
Australia and the USA:Father’s Day through the reading about opinions ,feelings and memories
of the children about their fathers




<b> B: teaching aids : </b>


flashcards ,extraboard , textbook, cassette.


<b>c :procedure</b>


<b> I.warm up: Table conpletion</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(62)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=62>

1 01 / 01



2 Valentin


3 08 / 03


4 April Fool ’s Day


5 30 / 4


6 May Day


7 02 / 9


8 Christmas


<b>II .pre-reading </b>


T.present new words.
lose heart


groom
hug


considerate
generous
priority


sense of humor


T.checks new words by asking Ss matching the words
with their meaning



T.asks Ss some questions about Father’s Day.
- Is there Father’s day in Vietnam?


- If yes ,what could you do on that day?


<b>III.while reading</b>


T.plays the casette once or twice
T.has Ss read silently


T.asks Ss to answer the questions.


1.who do you think Rita sends this card to ?
2.Does she loce him /her?


3.What does that person teach her


4.Has Jane got married ? If yes,what did her father do
on her wedding day?


5.Is Jane father alive or dead?


6.What quality makes Bob’s father different from
others?


7.Is Bob proud of his father?


8.What image of a father you can draw from the three
passages?



<b>IV.production:</b>


T.asks Ss to work in groups of 3 or 4 discussing about
one’s father ,using given questions


- Can you tell me about your father?
- How old is he?


- what does he do?
- What does he look like?


- What do you like best about him?


- What are your feelings and opinions? about him?
- Which memories do you have about your father that
you remember until now?


<b>V. homework:</b>


- Write a short passage about your father.
-Translate the text in to Vietnamese
<b>VI.Comment</b><i><b>:</b></i><b> </b>






Ss.copy



Ss.rub out and remember


Ss.matching


Ss.answer the questions in groups


Ss.listen to the tape Ss.read the text silently
Ss.answer the questions in pairs


1.Rita sends this card to her father
2.Yes she does .


3.He teaches her hwo to cry,love and love


4.yes she is married and has some children.On her
wedding day ,her father stood and gave her a hug.
5.He may be dead .these idea may tell that :


“ ...how much yuo are miss..,...I now have
children ,Dad...”


6.His sense of humor makes him different from
others


7.Yes,he is


8.A father can be a teacher,a care taker and a friend
Ss.work in groups todiscuss


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(63)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=63>

Plan: Period:54


Teach:


<i>unit8: celebrations</i>


<b>lesson 5: write</b>


<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to write to a friend to share their ideas about a
particular issue


<b> B: teaching aids :</b>


flashcards ,extraboard , textbook


<b> </b>c :procedure


<b>I. warm up:</b>Classification


T.asks to classify the given words into their correct
column


New Year’s Eve , gift , song , people,friends , Australian ,
tourist , Mother’s Day, season , cake , keyboard, Mid
Autumn Festival...


who which when


<b> II. pre-writing:</b>


1.Vocabulary pre teach
Essential



Enhance
Tradition
Day off
Out door
Support
Nationwide


T.sets a sence : In Vietnam people do not celebrate
Mother ‘s day or Father ’s Day .You think it is necessary
to have a day to celebrate for your mom and another for
your dad .Write to a friend to share/brainstorm the
reasons for celebrating when and how to celebrate these
day.


T.give out the questions:


- Why do we celebrate this day?


- In what time do we choose to celebrate?
- How to celebrate?


...


<b>III .while writing</b>


T.asks Ss to write to their friend to share the idea
T.help Ss with their writing


<b> IV.post writing</b>



T.presents Ss’writing on the board
<b>V. home work </b>


Learn by heart the outline of the writing
Complete their writing.


<b>VI.comment</b>


Ss.classify


Ss.listen to the T


Ss.match the same meaning words
- Improve


- Necessary


- all over the country
- A day away from work
- Outside / out of the house
- belief


- In favor of
Ss.listen


Ss.discuss in groups


Ss.read the outline in test book



Ss.work invidually


Ss.compare with their friend


Ss.give comment


Plan: Period:55
Teach:


<i>unit8: celebrations</i>


<b>lesson6: language focus</b>


<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to
- recognize and distinguish relative clauses
- know how to use their varios situations
<b>B: teaching aids : </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(64)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=64>

<b> </b>c :procedure


<b>I. warm up:</b>


T.has Ss work in groups


T.says the first clause of a complex sentence ans
asks Ss to complete that sentence.


1.New Year is the day when ...
2.May Day is the day when ...
3.Father ’Day is the day when...



<b>II. presentation and practise:</b>


<b>Action1:</b> Relative clause
1.<b>Which</b> as a relative pronoun
T.gives 2 simple sentences
- Tet is a festival


- Tet occurs in late January or early February
T.combines these sentences


* Tet is a festival <i>which occurs in late January or</i>
<i>early February</i>


T.gives some pairs of sentences


a.Auld Lang Syne is a song .Auld Lang Syne is
sung on New Year Eve.


b.This watch is a gift . The watch was given to me
by my aunt on my 14th


birthday.


c.We often go to the town cultural house.The
town cultural house always opens on public
holidays.


d.I like reading the books .Books tell about
different people and their cultures



e.On my mom’s birthday my dad gave her
roses.The roses were very sweet and beautiful.
f.Judy liked the full moon festival very much
.The festival is celebrated in mid fall.


2.<b>Who</b> as a relative pronoun
T.gives 2 simple sentences


- My friend Tom can compose songs.
- He sings Western folk songs very well
T.asks Ss to give comment for the sentences
T.combine the sentences


*My friend Tom Who sings Western songs very
Well can compose songs


T.asks Ss to to combine some pairs of sentences.
a.Tomorrow I’ll go to the airport to meet my
friends.My friends come to stay with us during
the Christmas.


b.My father is the worker .My father is wearing a
blue shirt.


3.Describe the pictures using relative pronouns
T.asks Ss to work in groups to describe each of
the people in the pictures


<b>Action2:</b> Adverb clauses of concession


T.gives 2 sentences


-Thu Ha is not satisfied with her preparations for
Tet .She has decorated her house and made plenty
of cakes.


T.asks Ss to join the sentences using “although”
T.changes the complex sentence into a new one
using“even though or though”


T.Notice that there is no <b>but</b> in the complex
sentence with athough, though ,even though
T.has Ss do Ex3(72)


Ss.work in groups completing the sentences


Ss.pay attention to the example
Ss.indentify relative pronoun &clause
Ss.combine


a.Auld Lang syne is a song which is sung on
New Year Eve


b.This watch is a gift which was given to me
by my aunt on my 14th<sub> birthday.</sub>


c.We often go to the town cultural house
which always opens on public holidays
d.I like reading the books which tell about
different people and their cultures



e.On my mom ’s birthday my dad gave her
roses which were very sweet and beautiful
f.Judy liked the full moon festival which is
celebrated in mid fall very much.


a.Tomorrow I’ll go to the airport to meet my
friends who come to stay with us during the
Christmas.


b.My father is the worker who is wearing a
blue shirt


Ss.describe


Ss.join


Ss.give comment


Ss.do the ex


b.Although we don’t have a Mother’s Day in
Vietnam , Dad and I have special gifts and
parties for my Mom every year on the8th <sub>of </sub>


March.


c.We went to Hanoi to watch the parade on
the national Day last year even though we
live in Nam Dinh



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(65)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=65>

<b> Iii.homework:</b>


<b> -L</b>earn the form of the structures by heart
- Do Ex4(72).


<b>V.comment:</b>


though they don’t understand Vietnamese
culture very much


e.Even though in Australia Christmas season
is in summer ,Australians enjoy Christmas as
much as people in European countries do.
f.Although Jim came to the show late due to
the trafic jam , he could see the main part of
the show.


Plan: Period:56
Teach:


unit 9:natural disasters



lesson1:getting started +listen and read


<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to :


- get to know and use new words about the weather.
- understand the information in a weather forecast



- know the convesation between Thuy and her grandmother.


<b> B: teaching aids : </b>pictures ,flashcards ,extraboard , textbook, cassette


<b> c :procedure</b>


.


<b>I. warm up:</b>


T.sticks 3 pictures on the board ,then asks Ss
to match with their name


<b>II. presentation:</b>


T.draws Ss’ attention to the picture on page
75 and asks Ss


In which program can we see these pictures?
T.sets a sence to present the text


T.has Ss listen to the text twice
T.presents new words


- 23o <sub>C ( twenty three degrees Celcius</sub>


- coast ( n)bê biÓn


- thunderstorm ( n) b·o cã ma to vµ


sÊm sÐt


- expect (v) sẽ đón nhận
- trust (v) tin vào


<b>III .practice:</b>


T.has Ss practise the dialogue in pairs T.asks
Ss to do exercise under the dialogue


<b>IV. production </b>


T.asks Ss to work in groups making a
weather forecast for the following day in
I<b>V. homework:</b>


learn the new words by heart


Read the dialogue and translate into
Vietnamese


<b>V.Comment:</b>


Ss.use flashcard words stick on the right pictures
- Picture 1: snow storm


- Picture 2: earthquake
- Picture 3: volcano
- Picture 4: typhoon



Ss.look at the picture and answer the question
- Weather forecast


Ss.listen to the text
Ss.practise pronunciation
Ss.copy


Ss.practise the dialogue in pairs Ss.do the ex
1.turn up / weather forecast


2.raining


3.central highlands
4.have temperatures
5.weather forecasts / them


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(66)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=66>

Plan: Period:57
Teach:


unit 9:natural disasters



<b>lesson2 : speak</b>


<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to


- know what should be prepared for a typhoon


- improve the discussion skills agreeing and didagreeing



<b>B: teaching aids :</b>


pictures ,flashcards ,extraboard , textbook,


<b>c :procedure</b>


<b> I.warm up:</b>


T.has Ss.play a game “Networds”


<b>II .Pre- speaking:</b>


* Vocabulary preteach
- Canned food


- Bucket
- Fix the leak
- Roof
- Door latch
- Power cut
- Available
- Damage
- Peg


T.asks Ss to do Ex1 in text book( check what
preparations Ss think should be made for a
typhoon)


T.tells Ss tocompare with their partner work in


pairs


T.gives possible answers
1.buying some canned food
2.buying candles


3.buying matches


4 filling all the buckets with water
5.fixing the leak in the roof


6.tying the roof to the ground with pegs and
ropes


7.checking all the windows and door latches


<b> </b> <b>IV.while speaking </b>


T.asks Ss to work in pairs to talk about what they
want to do to prepare for a typhoon ; explain why
Eg:A.I think weshould buy some canned food
before a typhoon


B.Yes ,I agree with you .The market will be
closed and no food wiil be available.


<b>V.post speaking</b>


True /False repetation



T.says 10 statements or more about what we
should do to prepare for a typhoon


Eg :


- We should buy some candles
- We should clean the house
- We should hold a party
- we should go to the movies
<b>VI. home work </b>


Write a short passage about what you should do
to pre[are for a typhoonabout your country.
<b>VI.comment</b>


- snow storm


Ss.match the words with their meaning
- thïng


- hp


- làm h hại /phá huỷ
- then cửa


- mất điện
- sửa chỗ dột
- cọc


- mái nhà



- cú th mua đợc
Ss.do Ex1 B


Ss.compare with their partner


Ss.work in pairs, then express your ideas in te
class to share with others


Ss. do T / F


Ss. do at home


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(67)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=67>

Plan: Period:58
Teach:


unit 9:natural disasters



<b>lesson3: listen</b>



<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to


- get to know some ideas on how to live with earthquakes through
sentences completion exercise


- listen to the talk better ,identify and catch key words for the answers


<b>B: teaching aids :</b>



pictures ,flashcards ,extraboard , textbook,cassette
<b>c :procedure:</b>


<b>I warm up:</b>Questioning


1.Do you know anything about earthquakes ?
2.Are they dangerous?


3.Are there many earthquakes in Vietnam?


4.In which cuontries do earthquakes usually occur?
5What would you do If an earthquake occured?
(before,while,and after the earthquake)


<b>II. pre-listening:</b>


- Vocabulary pre-teach
Fixture (n)


Block(v)
Zone (n)
Roller(n)
Container(n)
Doorway(n)
Corner (n)
-Check vocabulary


T.writes all the words on the board,the letters in these
words are in uncorrect order





<b>III .while listening:</b>


T.has Ss listen to the tape twice
T.asks Ss to complete the sentences


<b> </b>


<b>IV.post listening</b>


T.asks Ss to work in groups, making short presentation
on how to live with earthquakesbased on the


information in the listening


<b>V. home work </b>


Write a short passage on how to live with earthquakes
<b>VI.comment</b>


Ss.answer the questions


Ss.practise their pronunciation


Ss.rearrange the letters to make meaningful
words



Ss.repeat these words
Ss.say their meaning


Ss.listen to the text
Ss.complete the sentences
1.bottom shelf of the bookshelf
2.fridge


3.washing machine
4.mirrors 5.a window
6.inside 7.a strong table
8.doorway


9.corner of the room
Ss.group working


Plan: Period :59
Teach:


unit 9:natural disasters



lesson4: read



<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to get general back ground information on some
common natural disaster as earthquakes , tidal waves , typhoons , volcanoes , tornadoes through
comprehension exercises :True/ False and sentence completion





<b> B: teaching aids :</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(68)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=68>

<b> c:procedure</b>


.


<b> I.warm up:</b>


T.gives definition of 4 natural disasters that Ss will learn in
the lesson


T.asks Ss to match the name of the disasters to its correct
definition


1.Earthquake
2.Tidal wave
3.Typhoon
4.Volcano
5.Tornado


a.Mountain or hill with
opening through which ashs
and gases ejected.


b.Violent storm especially in
East AsianSeas


c.Violent storm over small


area


d.Another word for tsunami ,
waves causes by the tides
e.Sudden and violent
movements of the earth’s
surface


<b>II .pre-reading </b>


- Vocabulary pre- teach
- Pacific Rim
- Collapse
- Arupt
- Shift


- Hurricane = cyclone = typhoon
- Erupt(v) eruption(n)


- Funnel
- Baby carriage
- True / False prediction


T asks Ss to guess the information in ex1


<b> III.while reading</b>


T.plays the casette once or twice


T.asks Ss to read the text silently to check their prediction




Ex2:sentence completion


T.asks Ss to read the text again to get information
completing the sentences


1.The majority of earthquakes ...


2.During the earthquake in Kobe , many...
3.A tidal wave can only occur when....
4.In Australia ,a tropical storm in known ...
5.The Chinese language gave us ....


6.Tornado is a type of storm that ....<b> </b>
<b> </b>


<b>V.post reading:</b>


T.calls on some students to read aloud the passage


T.has Ss work in groups ,finding out 20 numbers or words
about 5 natural disasters


Eg : 90% ;Kobe ...
<b>V. homework:</b>


- Read the passage again
- Erdo Ex in text book



<b> VI.Comment:</b>




Ss.match


Ss.read the new words


Ss.guess the meaning of the new words


Ss.predict
Ss.listen


Ss.read the text silently and check their
prediction


Answer key:
1. true
2. true
3. false
4. true
5. false
6. true


Ss.read the text again


Ss.work in group to complete the sentences.
1... occur around the Pacific Rim.



2... people were killed when homes, office
blocks and highways


3...there is an abrupt shirf in the underwater
movement of the earth


4.. a cyclone


5..the word “typhoon”


6.. passed over land below a thunderstorm and
can suck up anything that is in its path.


Ss. read alou the passage


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(69)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=69>

Plan: Period :60
Teach:


unit 9:natural disasters



<b>lesson5: write</b>



<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to write a short story by using guided information
and pictures




<b> B: teaching aids :</b>



flashcards ,extraboard , textbook ,pictures
<b>c :procedure</b>


<b>I: warm up:Questioning</b>


T.asks Ss some questions
- Have you ever written a story?
- What is it about?


- Did you write it in Vietnamese or english?
- Do you think it is a good story?


<b>II. pre-writing:</b>


T.persents some new words
- circle (n)


- shelter(n)
- scared (adj)
- behave (v)


- suddenly = all of a sudden
T.presents the pictures in text book
T.has Ss see the pictures


T.asks Ss some Qs about each picture
Eg: Picture 1


- Is it a beautiful day or an awful day?



- what about the sky, the sun and the weather?


<b>III .while writing</b>


T.asks Ss to work in groups to write the story
using the pictures and guided words.


T.asks Ss to compare their writing with the other
groups


T.presents Ss’writing on the board


<b> </b>


<b> IV.post writing:</b>


<b>Story telling competition</b>


<b> V. home work </b>


Write a short passage about a natural disaster
that you have ever met




Ss.answer the questions


Ss.answer the Qs.



Ss.look at the pictures
Ss.answer the questions
Ss.rub out and remember.
Ss.copy the new words
Ss work in groups


It was a beautiful day .The sun was
shining , the sky was blue and the weather
was perfect.Lan was outside playing with her
dog,Skippy.


All of a sudden , the dog began behaving
strangely. She kept running aruond in


circles.Lan ran home with the dog to tell her
mother what Skippy was doing .Lan’s
mother ,Mrs Quyen gathered her family and
told them to find shelter in the house.


suddenly ,the sky became very dark. The
storm came with strong winds and heavy
rain.Mrs Quyen and her family were scared,
but soon the storm finished and everyone
was glad. what a clever dog Skippy in .She
saved Lan from being caught in the typhoon.
Ss.work in groups to retell their recent
writing


Plan: Period:61


Teach:


unit 9:natural disasters



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(70)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=70>

<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to use :


- futher practise the use of relative pronouns : Who and Which
- know the use of that as a relative pronoun


- clearly indentify defining and non - defining clauses
<b>B: teaching aids :</b>


extraboard , textbook
<b>c :procedure:</b>


<b> I. warm up:</b>


T.asks Ss to match the right answers to the questions


Questions


1.Which country in Japan was struck by a
huge earthquake in 1995?


2.which country won the 1998 Tiger Cup?
3.Which animal has one or two horn on its
snout?



4.Which explorer discovered America?
5.Which plannet is closest to the earth?


6.Which animal in Vietnam was choosen to be
the logo of Sea games 2003?


7.Which ASEAN country is divided into two
regions by the sea?


8.Which food you can chew but you can not
swallow and which one you can swallow but
can not chew?


<b>II. presentation+ practice</b>


Action 1:


T.asks Ss to answer the questions in warm up
again using relative pronoun


Eg:


1.The country which was struck by a huge
earthquake in 1995 in Japan is Kobe.


T.explains <b>who</b> or <b>which</b> can be replaced by


<b>that</b>


T.asks Ss to read aloud the answers



<b>Action 2</b> Non- defining clause
T.gives 2 complex sentences


1.This watch is a gift <i>which was givento me </i>
<i>on my 14th <sub>birthday</sub></i><sub>.</sub>


2.My grandfather <i>who often goesfishing</i> is 80
years old


T.asks Ss to find relative clauses
T.asks Ss the function of each clause


T.explains the difference and helps Ss know
the difining and non- defining clause:
T.has Ss do Ex2 and Ex3


<b> III.production :</b>


Ex 4:Rewrite Ex3 ,replace each underlined
clause with a clause you have written.You may
use the facts or


your imagination


<b> IV.homework:</b>


<b> L</b>earn the form of the structures by heart and
do the Ex in text book again.



<b>V.comment</b>


answers


a.Malaysia
b.Singapore
c.Kobe


d.Water / Chewing gum
e.Mars


f.Rhinoceros


g.Christopher Columbus
h.buffalo


Answer key:


1- c 2- b 3- f 4- g
5- e 6- h 7- a 8- d


Ss.do the ex in 5’


Ss.read the whole sentences


Ss.find relative clause


Ss.say the defining and non- defining clause
and rewrite



2.My grand father ,who often goes fishing ,is 80
years old


Ss.do Ex2 and Ex3
Ss.work in groups
Eg:


1.Kangaroos ,which come from Australia, have
long tails.


- ...,which can be seen everywhere in
Australia,...


Plan: 9A1 Period:62
Teach:9A3


<b>written test</b>



Time:45 minutes


<b> A.aims : </b>


-Check Ss’knowledge from unit8 to 9


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(71)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=71>

-T.has plan to help the bad Ss and change the best Ss group


<b>B. contents:</b>


Vo Thi Sau Secondary school Date:.../ 04/2007



<b>written test</b>

(

Time:45 minutes)


Full name : ... Class: ...


<b>Marks</b> <b>Teacher s comments</b>’


<b>number one</b>


<b>I.Choose the best answer from A,B ,C or D(2 marks)</b>


1.Now he looks very tired ... he didn’t go to bed early last night
A.so B.because C.but D. and


2.I suggest ...to the movies


A.go B.to go C.going D.went
3.Can you turn ... the light? It’s too dark here.


A.on B.off C.in D.for
4.We are going to ...our 30th <sub>wedding anniversary. </sub>


A.to celebrate B.celebrated C.celebrating D.celebrate


5.The ... of Mount Pinatubo in 1991 was one of the worst natural disasters
A.erruption B.earthquake C.typhoon D.tydal wave


6.The word “Typhoon” comes from ...


A.Chinese B.China C.American D.Asia



<b>II.Rewrite the following sentenses using relative pronouns(2 marks)</b>


1.My brother told me about the festival . The fastival was held in Hoi An last
summer( which )


...
2. Mr.Long is my form teacher . He has just talked to you in the yard (who)
...


3.I don’t know the people .They live next door to me ( who)


...
4.Ho Chi Minh City is the largest city in Vietnam.It is the center of culture ,
business ... (which )


...


<b> </b>


<b> III.Give the correct form of the verbs ( 4 marks)</b>


1. ... she (finish) ... her test yet?
2.Would you mind (open )... front door?


3.She enjoys (listen) ... English songs on MTV .


<b> </b>4.He wishes he (know) ...more english words


<b>IV.Read the following passage to do the exercise(2 marks)</b>



In the USA ,Mother’s Day is celebrated on the second Sunday in May.On this ocasion,Mother
usually receives greeting cards and gifts from her husband and children.The best gift of all for an
American Mom is a day of leisure.The majority of American mothers have outside as well as
housework,so their working days are often very hard .The working mother enjoys the traditional
Mother’s day custom of breakfast cooked by her family and served to her on a tray in bed . Later
in that day,It’s also traditional for the family to get together for dinner ,either in a restaurant or in
of their homes


Flower is an important part of Mother’s Day .Mothers are often given a plant for the occasion
,particularly if they are elder


* True / False sentences


1.Mother’sDay is celebrated on 2nd <sub>Sunday of May ... </sub>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(72)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=72>

4.Flower is not important on Mother’s Day. ...


Vo Thi Sau Secondary school Date:.../04/2007


<b>written test</b>

(

Time:45 minutes)


Full name : ... Class: ...


<b>Marks</b> <b> Teacher s comments</b>’


<b>number two</b>


<b>I.Choose the best answer from A,B ,C or D(2 marks)</b>



1.Trang worked hard on Math ,... her Math teacher was veryglad.
A.so B.because C.but D. and


2.I suggest ... tennis this afternoon .


A.play B.to play C.played D.playing
3.Could you turn ... the TV ? I am doing my homework.
A.on B.off C.in D.for
4.Remember to ... the passage into Vietnamese
A.to translate B.translated C.translating D.translate


5.Vietnamese people celebrate Independence Day ...September every year
A.in B.on C.at D.for


6.Most of the ... happen around the Pacific Rim.


A.hurricanes B.tropical storms C.erruptions D.earthquakes


<b>II.Rewrite the following sentenses using relative pronouns (2 marks)</b>
<b> </b>1.Do you know the man ? He is talking to my parents (who)


...
2.I couldn’t go to the show . The show was held in Hoa Binh Stadium (which)
...


3. Thomas Edison worked very hard . He invented the light bulb. (who)
...
4.An earthquake is strong enough to cause damage to building. The earthquake
measures 6 or higher on the Richter Scale (which)



...


<b>III.Give the correct form of the verbs ( 4 marks)</b>


1.I never (be )... in Bangkok before.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(73)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=73>

<b> </b>4.They enjoy ( play ) ... football with friends after school.


<b> IV.Read the following passage to do the exercise(2 marks)</b>


In the USA ,Mother’s Day is celebrated on the second Sunday in May.On this ocasion,Mother
usually receives greeting cards and gifts from her husband and children.The best gift of all for an
American Mom is a day of leisure.The majority of American mothers have outside as well as
housework,so their working days are often very hard .The working mother enjoys the traditional
Mother’s day custom of breakfast cooked by her family and served to her on a tray in bed . Later
in that day,It’s also traditional for the family to get together for dinner ,either in a restaurant or in
of their homes


Flower is an important part of Mother’s Day .Mothers are often given a plant for the occasion
,particularly if they are elder


* True / False sentences


1.Mother’sDay is celebrated on 2nd <sub>Sunday of May ... </sub>


2.Mother usually receives greeting cards and gifts from her family ...
3.Mother cooks breakfast on this occasion. ...
4.Flower is not important on Mother’s Day. ...



Plan: Period:63
Teach:9A1


9A3


unit 10:life on others planets



lesson1:getting started +listen and read


<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to :


- talk about UFOs with basic information received through discussion and
the reading


- know the form and use of conditional sentences type II.
- get the knowledge about the others planets


<b> B: teaching aids :</b>


pictures ,flashcards ,extraboard , textbook,cassette


<b> D :procedure</b>


.


<b>I.GETTING STARTED:</b>


T.asks Ss some questions



1.What are these pictures about?
2.Have you ever heard aboutUFOs? Do
you think they really exist?


3.Have you ever seen any films on
UFOs? Wat were they about?


4.What do you want to know about UFOs?
5.If you saw a UFO ,what would you want to
do?


T. explains the use and form of conditional
sentences type II


<b>II. presentation:</b>


1.Vocabulary pre- teach
Meteor(n)


Sighting(n)


Ss.answer the questions




Ss.read the Qs in text book.
Ss.tick


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(74)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=74>

Alien
Sample(n)



Space craft = air craft
Egg-shaped(adj)
claim


Plate -like (adj)
Treetop(n)


2.Checking vocabulary : Tumbled words
T.uses extra board


T.has Ss listen to the test twice


<b>III .practice:</b>


T.has Ss read the dialouge silently
T.asks one Ss to read aloud the dialouge
T.lets Ss do exercises in Ss’book


<i><b>Ex1:Find the words in the text having the </b></i>
<i><b>following meaning.</b></i>


1.proof,support


2.falling star,or shooting star


3.unknown/ strange people or things
4.bringing together or gathering
5.caught as a prisoner



6.became impossible to see


<i><b>Ex2:complete the note</b></i>


T.asks Ss to work in pairs


<b>IV. production </b> matching


A B


1. 1947 a. A woman
2. 1952 b. A farmer
3. 1954 c. Kenneth Arnold
4. 1964 d. A young pilot


5. 1971 e. 1,500 UFO sightings
6. 1978 f. Two men


I<b>V. homework:</b>


Read the text and translate into Vietnamese.
Do the ex under the text
<b>V.Comment:</b>


sao băng
tàu vũ trụ
lần chứng kiến
giống hình quả trứng
ngän c©y



nhËn r»ng


ngời ngồi hành tinh
giống hình chiếc đĩa


Ss. look at the board and rearrange the tumbled
words.


Ss.listen
Ss.read silently
Ss.read aloud


Ss.do Ex1 invidually,then compare with their
partner


1. evidence
2. meteor
3. aliens
4. collecting
5. captured
6. disappeared


Ss.read the text and complete the note


a)An aircraft, a weather balloon or a meteor ...
b) ... nine large round objects travelling at
about 2,800 meters an hours.


c) ...1,500 sightings
d) ... a UFO above their ...



e) ... an egg-shaped object in one of his fields
and also aliens collecting soil samples


f) ... claim they were captured by aliens and
taken aboard a space craft.


g) ...and his plane disappeared after sightings a
UFO...


h) ... that he saw a plate like device at a tree top
30m


Ss.match ,then read the information in the note





Plan: Period:64
Teach:




unit 10:life on others planets

<b>lesson2</b>



<b>: speak</b>


<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to



- speak in pairs about things which might be on Mars such as : water ,
little creatures, minerals,....


- be update with the back ground about Mars and solar systerm


<b>B: teaching aids :</b>


pictures ,flashcards ,extraboard , textbook


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(75)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=75>

<b> I.warm up</b> Guesing game
- What do you think there might be on
the Mars?


- Are there any people?
- Are there any plants?


<b> II.Pre- speaking:</b>


1.Vocabulary pre-teach
mineral(n)


microorganism(n)


gemstone = precious stone
sparkling (n)


trace (n)
2.Guessing



T.has Ss look at the map in text book and guess
the mean of the pictures on the map


T.gives correct answers


T.presents the dialogue between Nam and Minh


<b>IV.while speaking </b>


T.asks Ss to work in pairs to practise the
dialogue


<b> </b>


<b>V.post speaking</b>


T.asks Ss to work in groups and discuss what
they think there might be on the moon and
other planets.


<b>VI. home work </b>


Write a short passage about the things which
there might be on the Mars


<b>VI.comment </b>


Ss.guess


Ss.match with Vietnamese meaning


- dÊu vÕt


- chấm lóng lánh
- vi sinh vật
- đá q
- khống chất
Ss.look at the map
Ss.guess


Ss.practise in pairs


Ss.make similar dialogues
S1. What do these drawing say?
S2.They might be plants in Mars


S1What about those dark shapes on the left
conner?


S2 Well,they might be sign of gas.There may
be much gas on the Mars


Ss.work in groups


Plan: Period:65
Teach:


unit 10:life on others planets



<b>lesson3: listen</b>




<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to


- listen to a talk about the moon and be more confident in true/false
listening comprehension exercise


- get more information about the moon
<b>B: teaching aids :</b>


pictures ,flashcards ,extraboard , textbook, cassette


<b> </b>


<b> c :procedure:</b>


<b>I.warm up:</b> Matching


T.asks Ss to write Vietnamese name of the solar
planets


<b>II. pre-listening:</b>


1.Vocabulary - pre teach
fixture(n)


Science For Fun Program (n)
Crater


Olumpic Champion



Ss.write


Mercury - Sao Thuû
Venus


Earth
Mars
Jupiter
Saturn
Uranus
Neptune
Pluto


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(76)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=76>

2.True or false prediction


a) There are no water on the moon


b) There are rivers and lakes on the moon
c) There are no sounds on the moon
d) It is very cold at night on the moon
e) During the day the temperature is
even lower.


f) There are great round holes on the
moon


g) There are no mountains on the moon
h) You will weigh 8 kilos heavier on the


moon


i) You will be able to jump very high on
the moon


j) One day on the moon lasts for two
weeeks


<b>III .while listening:</b>


T.has Ss listen to the tape twice


T.asks Ss to check their prediction


<b>IV.post listening</b>


T.asks Ss to work in groups to make a short
presentation about the moon


T.encourages Ss to use the information in the
listening and their knowledge


Eg: Good morning, every body .This morning I
would like to speak to you about the


moon.There is no water and air on the moon ....
<b>V.home work </b>


Write a short passage about the moon
<b>VI.comment</b>



.


Ss.predict.


Ss.listen twice


Ss. give correct statements


a) There are no water on the moon
c) There are no sounds on the moon
d) It is very cold at night on the moon
f) There are great round holes on the
moon


i) You will be able to jump very high on
the moon


j) One day on the moon lasts for two
weeeks


Ss.work in groups to make a short presentation


Plan: Period :66
Teach9A1:


9A3:


unit 10:life on others planets




lesson4: read



<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to :


- enhance reading skill through ordering and answering questions
- practise reading a space trip


<b> B: teaching aids :</b>


flashcards , extraboard , textbook , pictures
<b>c:procedure</b>


<b> I.warm up:</b>


Question and answer
-Have you ever heard of a space trip?
-What do people go there for?


-What should we have to prepare if we
want to take a trip to space?


- What can we do there?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(77)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=77>

<b>II .pre-reading </b>


1.Vocabulary pre- teach
- get ready



- physical condition
- push up


- orbit
- cabin
- marvelous
- sighting
- experience


2. Check vocabulary


T.rubs out each word in English and keep their
Vietnamese maenings




3.Ordering statement prediction


T.presents Ex1 in text book (using extra
board)


T.asks Ss to read the exercise and guess the
order of the given statements


<b> III.while reading</b>


T.plays the casette once or twice


T.asks Ss to read and check their prediction



Ex2:Answer .Then write the answers in
full


sentences


1.What will you have to do if you
decide to


take a space trip?


2.What must you do if you want to
show you are in perfect health?


3.What scenes on the Earth can you from
outer space?


4.How many times a day can you see
those scenes?


5.What things can you do while you are
in orbit that you cannot do to when you
are on the Earth?


<b> iV.post reading:</b>


T.asks Ss to work in groups ,discussing
the question:


If you were able to take a space trip ,
what would you do to prepare for the


trip ?


what would you like to bring along?
what would you do there?


<b>V. homework:</b>


Write a short paragraph about a space trip
,using “post activity”


<b> VI.Comment:</b>




Ss.practise reading the new words
Ss.copy


When the words are rubs , Ss look at
Vietnamese meaning and recall all the
English words


Ss.read the given statements.
Ss.guess the order.


Ss.listen


Ss.read silently and check the order
* Answer key



4.Get ready and be in an excellent
physical condition


1.Get a letter from a doctor to show
you are in perfect health


5.Get on the trip


2.See the pictures of the earth, its
interesting places and stars from
very far


3.Feel free and enjoy wonderful
feeling


Ss.work in pairs to answer the questions
1.If we decide to take a space trip,we will
have to run a lot , swim every day ,and do
aerobiccs and push-ups to have an excellent
physical condition.


2.If we want to show we are in perfect
health,we must get a letter from the doctor.
3.We can see pictures of the Earth,


our country, intersting places, the oceans,
the big rivers ,the tall mountains...


4.We can see those scenes 16 times a day.
5.We can walk on the wall or on the


ceiling


Ss.work in groups to discuss the question


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(78)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=78>

Teach9A1:
9A3:


unit 10:life on others planets



<b>lesson5: write</b>



<b>A: objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to know how to
-write full sentences to make a passage


- write an argumentative exposition using the right format and language structures
<b>B: teaching aids :</b>


flashcards ,extraboard , textbook


<b> </b>c :procedure


<b>I.warm up:</b>


T.has Ss play “crosswords”


<b>II.pre-writing:</b>


<b>Action1:</b>



T.presents the topic of the lesson by explain the
definition of an argumentative writing.


T.asks Ss to read the outline of an expression in
column A .Then put the paragraphs in column
B in order to match the section in column A.


<b>Action2:</b>


T.has Ss work in pairs practising the dialogue
between An and Ba about the UFOs


<b>III.while writing</b>


T.tells Ss to use Ba’s opinions in the dialogue to
write an exposition independently.


T.goes around the class and has some
necessary corrections


<b>IV.post writing:</b>


-T.asks Ss to work in pairs and correct the
mistakes


- T asks some Ss to read aloud their writing.


<b> V.home work </b>



- Learn the outline by heart


- Write the argument again <b>VI.comment</b>




Ss.play the game.
Ss.listen
Ss.read the ex ,then arrange


1.<i><b>Introduction</b></i> (presents the writer’s viewpoint:
I think..., I believe...)


(ii) I don’t believe there exist UFOs even
though many newspapers talked a lot about
them.


2.<i><b>Body</b></i>(gives reasons/examples for persuasion:
Firstly,...:Secondly,...)


(iii) Firstly , flying saucers might be aircraft ,
balloons, clouds ,or tricks of light .Secondly,
there are not enough photos showing clearly the
shapes of the UFOs.Moreover,if there are UFOs
,there will certainly be traces of their landing
on the ground.


3.<i><b>Conclusion </b></i>(sums up the argument:
therefore,...)



Therefore,UFOs are just the imagination of
some writers and they do exist only in films for
entertainment


Ss.practise in pairs


Ss.individual work


Ss.work in pairs


Ss.read aloud their writing


Plan: period:68
Teach 9A1:


9A3:


unit 10:life on others planets

<b>lesson6:</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(79)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=79>

<b>A:objectives: </b>


By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able


- master the use of modal verbs : <b>May</b> and <b>Might</b>


- distinguish the difference betwwen conditional sentences type 1 and
type 2 and use them properly.


<b>B:teaching aids :</b>



extraboard , textbook


<b> </b>


<b> c:procedure:</b>


<b>I. warm up:</b>“Jumebled words”


T.has Ss write the new words in the correct
order:


1.aolobnl
2.ecrasru
3.ertnmgau
4.nilea
5.cespa
6.ratfc
7.ormete
8.tcerruea
9.pparree
10.pitr


<b>II. presentation+ practice</b>


<i><b>Action1:</b></i>Review the use of may /might
T.asks Ss about the form and use of modal
verb may /might


T.explains the difference between May/Might
T.has Ss do Ex1



<i><b>Action2:</b></i>Conditional sentences type 1
T.asks Ss to say the form and use again
T.asks Ss to do Ex2


<i><b> Action2: </b></i>Conditional sentences type 2
T.gives two simple sentences


- Lan is so busy


- She can’t write to her friends regularly
underlined words


T.rewite these sentences using conditional
sentences


- If Lan weren’t busy, she could /would write
to her friends regularly


T.asks Ss to give the form and use


T.explain: <i><b>would</b></i> can be replace by the other
model verbs: could


T.asks Ss to look at the pictures in the book
and complete the sentencesby using


conditional sentences type 2.


Eg: If Ba were rich ,he would travel around the


world.


Ss.write
1.balloon
2.saucer
3.argument
4.alien
5.space
6.craft
7.meteor
8.creature
9.appear
10.trip
Ss.retell


May/ Might +V(inf)


Ss.do Ex1 invidually


b) It may be a box of crayons ,or it might be a
box of paint


c)It may be a football or it might be a basket
ball.


...


Ss.say the form and use again


Ss.look at the pictures and use the given


words to complete the sentences


b) Lan will miss the bus if she does not hurry.
c)If Ha is not careful, he’ll drop the cup.
d) Mrs.Nga will join us if she finishes her
work early.


e)If Mrs.Binh writes a shopping list , she
won’t forget what to buy


Ss.translate the sentences into Vietnamese.
*Form


were


If +S + ved ..., S +would + V ...


*Use: It is used to describe imaginary and
unreal or untrue situation /action at the
present ro in the future.


b)If Mr.Loc had a car,he would drive to work.
c)If Lan lived in Ho Chi Minh City , she
would visit Saigon Water Park


d)Nam would arrived school on time if he had
an alarm clock


e)If Hoa lived in Hue , she would see her
parents every day.



f)If Nga owned a piano,she would play it very
well


g)Tuan would get better grades if he studied
harder.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(80)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=80>

<b>Iii.production:</b>


T.asks Ss to work with a partner and answer
the question :What would you do if you met
an alien from outer space?


<b>IV.comment</b>


enough money.


Ss.work in pairs answering the question


Plan: period:69
Teach 9A1:


9A3:


second semester revision


<b>a.aims</b>



- Help Ss consolidate vocabulary and structures in the second term
- Check Ss’ understanding by giving some kind of exercises
- Have Ss prepare for their coming test carefully



<b>b.procedure:</b>



<b> </b>


<b> i.warm up</b>


T.has Ss play a game “slap the board”
T.give some verbs (in the past )


T.let one Ss read the verb , the other slap


<b> ii.presentation + practise</b>


<b>Ex1: </b>Choose the best answer from A,B,C or
D.


1.New York ,..., I visited last year ,is a nice
old city.


2.Thuy’ grandma turned the TV ... to see the
weather forecast.


3.You should get a plumber ....the pipes in
your bathroom.


4.We decided not to go out for dinner ... we
were too tired.


5.My shoes are dirty .I would better take them


.... before I came into the house.


6.Who is going to look .... your children
,when you are at work?


<b>Ex2: </b>Complete the folowing sentences
1.We went out although ...
2.He had to walk home because ...
3.I was so tired , so ...


4.If it is nice tomorrow, ...


<b>Ex3: </b>Rewite the following sentences


1.We haven’t been to a concert for over a year
- The last time ...
2.People speak English all over the world
- English ...
3. “What is your name?”said the policeman to
the boy.


- The policeman asked ...
4.I don’t have money to go on holiday
- If ...
5.Will you tell the true? If so ,people will trust
you.


- If you...
6.I’m upset because I have so much work to
do this day



- I wish...


7.Is this the letter? You wanted me to mail it (
relative pronoun)


Ss.play the game.


1. A) which B)who C)that D) whom
2. A) off B)up C)on D) down
3. A) to check B)check C)checking
D)checks
4. A) but B)because C)so D) and
5. A) away B)up C)on D) off
6. A) for B)up C)after D) out


-The last time I saw her in over a year
- English is spoken all over the world


-The policeman asked the boy what his name
was.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(81)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=81>

- ...
8.that the girl. Tan and Hung were talking
about her(relative pronoun)


- ...


<b> iii.homework:</b>



Prepare carefully for the coming test by
reviewing vocabulary and structures in the
second semester.


<b> iv.comment:</b>


-If you tell the true , people wil trust you.
- I wish I didn’t have so much work to do this
day.


-Is this the letter which you wanted me to mail
-That is the girl whom Tan and Hung were
talking about.


Date: period:70

the second semester test



( Thi theo đề của sở giáo dục và đào tạo Tỉnh Hồ Bình)


Plan: period:71
Teach 9A1:


9A3:


correct the second semester test


<b>a.aims</b>



T.helps Ss correct their test themselves.
T.gives comment for the test



Ss.mark their test

<b>b.content:</b>



Vo Thi Sau Secondary school Date:.../ 04/2007


<b>written test</b>

(

Time:45 minutes)


Full name : ... Class: ...


<b>Marks</b> <b>Teacher s comments</b>’


<b>number one</b>


<b>I.Choose the best answer from A,B ,C or D(2 marks)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(82)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=82>

2.Isuggest ...to the movies


A.go B.to go C.going D.went
3.Can you turn ... the light? It’s too dark here.


A.on B.off C.in D.for
4.We are going to ...our 30th <sub>wedding anniversary. </sub>


A.to celebrate B.celebrated C.celebrating D.celebrate


5.The ... of Mount Pinatubo in 1991 was one of the worst natural disaster
A.cyclone B.earthquake C.typhoon D.tydal wave


6.The word “Typhoon” comes from ...



A.Chinese B.China C.American D.Asia


<b>II.Rewrite the following sentenses using relative pronouns(2 marks)</b>


1.My brother told me about the festival . The fastival was held in Hoi An last summer( which )
...
...


2. Mr.Long is my form teacher . He has just talked to you in the yard (who)
...


3.I don’t know the people .They live next door to me ( who)


...
4.Ho Chi Minh City is the largest city in Vietnam.It is the center of culture ,
business ... (which )


...


<b> </b>


<b>III.Give the correct form of the verbs ( 4 marks)</b>


1... she (finish) ... her test yet?
2.Would you mind (open )... front door?


3.She enjoys (listen) ... English songs on MTV .


<b> </b>4.He wishes he (know) ...more english words



<b>IV.Read the following passage to do the exercise(2 marks)</b>


In the USA ,Mother’s Day is celebrated on the second Sunday in May.On this ocasion,Mother
usually receives greeting cards and gifts from her husband and children.The best gift of all for an
American Mom is a day of leisure.The majority of American mothers have outside as well as
housework,so their working days are often very hard .The working mother enjoys the traditional
Mother’s day custom of breakfast cooked by her family and serced to her on a tray in bed . Later
in that day,It’s also traditional for the family to get together for dinner ,either in a restaurant or in
of their homes


Flower is an important part of Mother’s Day .Mothers are often given a plant for the occasion
,particularly if they are elder


* True / False sentences


1.Mother’sDay is celebrated on 2nd <sub>Sunday of May ... </sub>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(83)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=83>

Vo Thi Sau Secondary school Date:.../04/2007


<b>written test</b>

(

Time:45 minutes)


Full name : ... Class: ...


<b>Marks</b> <b> Teacher s comments</b>’


<b>number two</b>


<b>I.Choose the best answer from A,B ,C or D(2 marks)</b>



1.Trang worked on Vietnamese ,... her Vietnamese teacher was very glad.
A.so B.because C.but D. and


2.I suggest ... tennis this afternoon .


A.play B.to play C.played D.playing
3.could you turn ... the TV ? I am doing my homework.
A.on B.off C.in D.for
4.Remember to ... the passage into Vietnamese
A.to translate B.translated C.translating D.translate


5.Vietnamese people celebrate Independence Day ...September every year
A.in B.on C.at D.for


6.Most of the ... happen around the Pacific Rim.


A.hurricanes B.tropical storms C.erruptions D.earthquakes


<b>II.Rewrite the following sentenses using relative pronouns (2 marks)</b>
<b> </b>1.Do you know the man ? He is talking to my parents (who)


...
2.I couldn’t go to the show . The show was held in Hoa Binh Stadium (which)
...


3. Thomas Edison worked very hard . He invented the light bulb. (who)
...
4.An earthquake is strong enough to cause damage to building. The earthquake
measures 6 or higher on the Richter Scale (which)



...


<b>III.Give the correct form of the verbs ( 4 marks)</b>


1.I never (be )... in Bangkok before.


2.Would you mind (wait) ... for me a few minutes?
3.He wishes He (become) ...a doctor.


<b> </b>4.They enjoy ( play ) ... football with friends after school.


<b> IV.Read the following passage to do the exercise(2 marks)</b>


In the USA ,Mother’s Day is celebrated on the second Sunday in May.On this ocasion,Mother
usually receives greeting cards and gifts from her husband and children.The best gift of all for an
American Mom is a day of leisure.The majority of American mothers have outside as well as
housework,so their working days are often very hard .The working mother enjoys the traditional
Mother’s day custom of breakfast cooked by her family and serced to her on a tray in bed . Later
in that day,It’s also traditional for the family to get together for dinner ,either in a restaurant or in
of their homes


Flower is an important part of Mother’s Day .Mothers are often given a plant for the occasion
,particularly if they are elder


* True / False sentences


1.Mother’sDay is celebrated on 2nd <sub>Sunday of May ... </sub>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(84)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=84>

Period 6 Ngày tháng


năm


Unit 1

A visit from a pen pal



Lesson6: Language Focus



<b>A. Objective</b>



- Practice: the passive, wish (present wish)

<b>B. Teaching aids</b>



- Teaching plan, book, chalks …

<b>C. procedure</b>



<b>1. Warm up</b>


- greet


<b>2. Check old lesion</b>


- write a letter to a friend to talk
about your visiting.


<b>3. Pre-teaching</b>


- play a game (pelmanism -past
simple)


<b>4. While teaching</b>



- Practice the dialogue.


- Let ss practice, ask and answer
about Nga, Hoa, Lan Nam.


- T explains, ss write down.


- Present wish model.


Infinitive
Meet
Make
See
Go
Buy
Say
Have
Know
Paint
Hang
Draw


Past


1. Work with a partner.
Nga


A: What did Nga do on the weekend?
B: She went to a concert performed by
Ha Noi singers.



A: When did she go to see it?


B: She saw it on Saturday evening at
8pm.


2. Write the things they did to
prepare for the party.


(1) made a cake


(2) hung colorful lamps on the
wall


(3) bought flowers


(4) paint a picture of Ha Noi
(5) went shopping


3. Write wish


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(85)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=85>

5. <b>Home work.</b>


b. I wish I were in the swimming pool.
c. I wish I had a computer.


d. I wish I lived near school.
e. … had a sister.


f. … drew well.



g. … had my friend’s phone number.
h. … knew many friends.


I. I wish there were rivers and lakes in
my home town.


Date: 27/8/2006



Period 7


Unit 2

Clothing



Lesson 1: Getting started, listen and read



<b>A. Objective</b>



- Traditional dress. Ask and respond to questions on personal preferences.

<b>B. Teaching aids</b>



- Tape, cassette, Pictures, color chalk…

<b>C. Produce</b>



<b>1. Warm up</b>


- 15 minutes text


<b>2. Check old lesson.</b>


- check ss preparation.



<b>3. Pre teaching</b>


- T lets ss work in group: “look
at the dress which people in
the picture are wearing.
Decide where each person
comes from.


- Let Ss practice.


- T explants.


I. Give correct verbs form.


1. I wish I (have) a new bicycle.


2. Lan used to (walk) past the mosque
on her way to primary school.


3. I (not use to) learn English at
primary school.


II. Rewrite.


1. Lan always went swimming after
school last year.


+ Lan used ………



2. The house is too expensive and I can’t
buy it.


+ I wish ………


(?) today we will learn about traditional
costumes of some countries. First you
look at the dress ... comes from.


a. She comes from Japan. She
is wearing a kimono.


b. She comes from Vietnam.
She is wearing an Ao dai.
c. He comes from Scotland.


He is wearing a kilt.


d. She comes from India. She
is wearing a Sari.


e. He comes from the USA.
He is wearing a Cowboy.
f. She comes from Saudi


Arabia. She is wearing a
Veil.


1. Listen and read.



(?) Ao dai is our traditional dress, so
what do you know about Ao dai?


+ What material is Ao dai made from?
Silk


+ Who wear Ao dai?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(86)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=86>

<b>4. While-teaching</b>


- Listen.


- Ss read and find new words.


- Read


- Get Ss to show new words


- Listen and read the words


- Ss read


- Ss read the text.


- Ss read the exercises. T
explants and lets ss do.




-5. <b>Post-teaching</b>



- Ss answer the questions.


- T corrects.


<b>6. Home work</b>


one?
Poet
Poem


Writer-novel
Musicians-song
Slit


Pattern


Long silk tunic
Loose pant
Traditional
Design
Inspiration
Ethnic minority
Cross


Stripe


Unique dress


Nhà thơ


Bài thơ
n. văn
n. sĩ
đờng xẻ
mẫu vẽ
áo lụa dài
quần rộng


truyÒn thống/ cổ
điển


kiểu dáng
cảm hứng
dân tộc thiểu số
chữ thập


vạch kẻ


The present perfect
tense.


a. Complete the sentences
Describe


Majority
Alternative


Mô tả
đa số



sự lựa chọn


1. poems, novels and songs.
2. … a long silk tunic that is
slit on the sides and worn
over loose pants.


3. … to wear modern clothing
at work.


4. … lines of poetry on it.
5. … symbols such as suns,


stars, crosses and stripes.
b. Answer the questions.


1. By tradition/ traditionally,
men and women used to
wear the Aodai.


2. Because it is more
convenient.


3. They have printed lines of
poetry on it or have added
symbols such as suns, stars,
crosses and stripes on the
Aodai.


Talk about Aodai.



Ex. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 P.12 …


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(87)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=87>

Date: 10/9



Period 8


Unit 2

Clothing



Lesson 2: Speak



<b>A. Objective</b>



- Talking about dress and personal preferences.

<b>B. Teaching aids</b>



- Pictures, color chalk book …

<b>C. Produce</b>



<b>1. Warm up</b>


- T greets.


<b>2. Check old lesson.</b>


- T gets a student to talk about
Ao dai.


<b>3. Pre teaching</b>



- read the phrases.


- ss look at the pictures and call
the name of the clothes.


- T lets ss match the phrases to
the pictures.


<b>4. While-speaking</b>


- Let ss works in groups.


- T explants new words.


- Let ss practice: ss ask and
answer the questions.


- Let ss write 2 more questions.


- Ss practice.


- T gets some groups to practice
aloud.


5. <b>Post-speaking</b>


- Let ss use the information
while working in groups to
report.



- T gives the form of reported
sentences.(used in this lesion)


<b>6. Home work</b>


a, Match the phrases to the pictures.
plaid(adj.)


plain(n.)


sleeveless(adj.)
striped(adj.)
baggy(adj.)
faded(adj.)


kẻ vuông
trơn, một mầu
k tay


co sọc


rộng thing thình
phai mÇu


a
b
c
d
e
f


g
h
I


1
5
6
3
8
4
7
2
9


b, Work in small groups. Let ss write two
more questions for the last section of this
survey about students’ wear. Then
interview members of another group. The
words in section a) may help you.


Casual ['kæʒjuəl] binh thuong
in book(p. 15)


+ What type of clothes do you wear on
Tet holiday?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(88)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=88>

S + said that + n/pron. +V(past simple)


Ex. 4,5 P. 16, 17



<b>7.Sum - up experience</b>.


Date: 12/9



Period 9


Unit 2

Clothing



Lesson 3: Listen



<b>A. Objective</b>



- Talking about dress and personal preferences.

<b>B. Teaching aids</b>



- Pictures, color chalk book …

<b>C. Produce</b>



<b>1. Warm up</b>


- T greets.


<b>2. Check old lesson.</b>


- T gets a student to report the
survey about students’ wear.


<b>3. Pre teaching</b>


- Let ss look at the pictures and


call the name and color of the
clothes.


- T explains the content and the
of the exercise.




- Listen to the tape.


<b>4. While-listening</b>


- Let ss works in groups.


- T explants new words.


- Let ss practice: ss ask and
answer the questions.


- Let ss write 2 more questios.


a. A- floral pants
B- blue shorts
C- polka dot skirt


b. A- long sleeved white blouse
B- short sleeved pink shirt


You will hear a public announcement
about a lost little girl called Mary.


Listen and check (√) the letter of the
correct picture to show what Mary is
wearing.


a. B- She is wearing blue shorts.


b. A- ……….. a long sleeved
blouse.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(89)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=89>

- Ss practice.
5. <b>Post-listening</b>


- Talk about your friends’ clothes.


<b>6. Home work</b>


Learn the words about clothing.


<b>7. Sum - up experience</b>.


Date: 14/9
Period 10


Unit 2

Clothing



Lesson 4: Read



<b>A. Objective</b>



- Practice reading skill by reading the text about clothes, getting


information about jeans.


- By the end of the lesion ss will be able to know some information about
clothes, especially jeans.


<b>B. Teaching aids</b>



- Teaching plan, book, picture …

<b>C. Produce</b>



<b>1. Warm up</b>


- Greet.


- T asks some questions.


<b>2.Check old lesion</b>.


- Talk about clothes with you
often wear.


<b>3. Pre reading.</b>


- Playing game.


Brainstorming. (about jeans)


- Playing “matching game”


What clothes do you like wearing at


school? /weekend?


Jeans


easy to wear
convenient
fashionable
durable (ben)


1. material
2. style
3. embroider


[im'brɔidə]


4. label


5. out of fashion
6. generation


a. kiểu cách
b. lỗi thời
c. thế hệ
d. chất liệu
e. thªu
f. nh·n hiƯu
1-d; 2-a; 3-e; 4-f; 5-b; 6-c.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(90)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=90>

<b>4. While-reading</b>



- Let ss read the text and find
out missing words and date.


- T lets ss read the text and find
information to answer the
questions.


<b>5. Post-speaking</b>


- Get some ss to practice.


<b>6. Home work</b>


2. 1960s – students
3. 1970s – cheaper
4. 1980s – fashion
5. 1990s –sale
Questions


1. The word jeans comes from a kind
of material that was made in
Europe.


2. The 1960s’ fashions were
embroidered jeans and so on.
3. Because jeans became cheaper.
4. In the 1980s.


5. Because worldwide economic
situation got worse in the 1990s.


Ex. 6, 7, 8.


7. <b>Sum - up experience</b>.


Week: 6
Date: 19/8
Period: 11


Unit 2

Clothing



Lesson 5: Write



<b>A. Objective</b>



- Give opinion about wearing uniform.

<b>B. Teaching aids</b>



- Teaching plan, book, chalks …

<b>C. Produce</b>



<b>1. Warm up</b>


- Greet.


<b>2.Check old lesion</b>.


- T gets a student to talk
about Jeans.


<b>3. Pre writing</b>



- T explains how to write an
argument.( li le, luan cu)


Organization Language
Introduction lets the


reader know
the writer’s


point of


view


My opinion
is …


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(91)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=91>

<b>4. While- writing</b>


- Let ss look at part a then
read the outline.


- Read the passage, note the
underline words.


- T gives some new words.


- Let ss read the outline b
and write a paragraph that
support the argument that


secondary school students
should wear casual clothes.


<b>5. Post-writing</b>


- Ss read some good exercises.
6. <b>Home work</b>


<b>7. sum up experiments.</b>


Series of


arguments Firstly, ...Secondly,
Finally,


Conclusion Therefore,


In


conclusion, .
.


+ bear their school name – The hien hinh
anh cua truong.


+ to encourage sb in sth.


to do sth. – khich le,
dong vien



- equal(adj.) – cong bang
- confident – tu tin


- casual clothes – thuong vuc
Key


In my opinion, secondary students should
wear casual clothes.


Firstly, casual clothes make students feel
comfortable.


Secondly, wearing casual clothes give
students freedom of choice. They have right
to choose size, color and fashion that they
love.


Thirdly, casual clothes make students feel
self-confident when they are in their
favorite clothes.


Finally, casual clothes make school more
colorful and lively.


In conclusion, secondary school students
should wear casual clothes. Wearing casual
clothes is convenient, comfortable and fun.


Write a passage talk about “should students
go to extra classes?”



Date: 19/8
Period: 12


Unit 2

Clothing



Lesson6: Language Focus



<b>A. Objective</b>



- Practice: the preset perfect tense, passive.

<b>B. Teaching aids</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(92)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=92>

<b>C. procedure</b>



<b>1. Warm up</b>


- greet


<b>2. Check old lesion</b>


- Give opinion about wearing
uniform.


<b>3. Pre-teaching</b>


- T talk about the present perfect
with yet, just, already, recently



- Let ss practice.


<b>4. While teaching</b>


- Practice the present perfect
tense.


- T explains some new words
and let ss practice.


- Practice the passive.




-1. Work with a partner. Read the
dialogue.


Present perfect.
(?) Verbs form
(?) How to use


(The dialogue in book)


2. Work with your partner. Imagine you
and your partner are visiting Ho Chi
Minh City. Ask and answer questions
about the things you have done. Use the
present perfect tense of the verbs in the
box.



A: Have you ever seen Giac Lam
Pagoda yet?


B: Yes, I’ve already seen it.


A: have you eaten Vietnamese food yet?
B: No, I haven’t.


reunification


vegetarian - do an chay
amusement


3. Work with a partner. Ask and answer
questions about each of the items in the
box.


A: Have you ever …?
B: Yes, I have.


A: When did you last …?
comic - chuyen vui
durian - qua sau rieng


4. Read the first … use the passive
form.


a. Jeans cloth was made ………….
b. Rice is grown in ………..



c. Five … will be produced in France
next year.


d. A new style of jeans has just been
introduced in the USA.


e. Two department stores have been
built this year.


5. Change the sentences from the active
in to the passive.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(93)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=93>

5. <b>Home work.</b>


6. <b>Sum up experiment.</b>


b. Experiment on animals should be
stop.


c. Life might be found on another
planet.


d. All the schools in the city have to be
improved.


e. A new bridge in the area is going to
be built.


prepare for next lesion



Date: 24/9



Period 13


Bµi kiĨm tra 1 tiÕt sè 1


Date: 24/9



Period 14


Unit 3

A trip to the countryside



Lesson 1: Getting started, listen and read



<b>A. Objective</b>



- By the end of the lesion ss will be able to talk about activities in the
countryside.


<b>B. Teaching aids</b>



- Tape, cassette, Pictures, color chalk, teaching plan…

<b>C. Produce</b>



<b>1. Warm up</b>


- Greet


<b>2. Check old lesson.</b>



- Check ss preparation.


<b>3. Pre teaching</b>


- T shows the pictures. Lets ss
work in groups, talk about the
pictures.


- T asks, ss answer.


- Let Ss practice.


- T explants.


<b>4. While-teaching</b>


- Listen.


- Ss read and find new words.


1. Getting Started.


(?) What is/ are he/ she/ they doing?
1. … watering the vegetables.


2. … swimming in the (water) river.
3. … feeding chickens.


4. … harvesting crop.
5. … feeding a pig.



6. … plowing in the field.


7. A buffalo boy is playing his kite.
8. Some children are playing football.
2. Listen and read.


+ Have a chance to do something.
+ Be welcome.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(94)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=94>

- Read


- Get Ss to show new words


- Listen and read the words


- Ss read


- Ss read the text.


- Ss read the exercises. T
explants and lets ss do.


5. <b>Post-teaching</b>


- Ss answer the questions.


- T corrects.


<b>6. Home work</b>



A small bamboo forest 1 cum tre
banyan ['bæniən] da


snack thuc an nhanh
shrine [ Srain] lang mo/ mieu


a. True of False
1. f


2. t


3. f. There’s a big old banyan tree


4. f. People had a snack under the
banyan.


5. t


6. f. People had a picnic on the river
bank.


7. t


8. f. Liz took a lot of photos…
9. t


b. Answer.



1. It’s about 60 kilometers to the
north of Ha Noi.


2. By bus.


3. The banyan tree is at the entrance
to the village.


4. On the mountain they saw the
shrine of a Vietnamese hero.
5. They had a picnic on the river


bank.


6. Liz took a lot of photos to show
the trip to her parents.


7. She wishes she could visit Ba’s
village again some day.


<b>7. Sum - up experience.</b>


<b>Week 8</b>



Date: 28/9



Period 15


Unit 3

A trip to the countryside




Lesson 2: Speak



<b>A. Objective</b>



- Practice asking for and giving information about countryside.

<b>B. Teaching aids</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(95)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=95>

<b>C. Produce</b>



<b>1. Warm up</b>


- T greets.


<b>2. Check old lesson.</b>


- T gets a student to answer
some questions.


<b>3. Pre teaching</b>


- T asks some questions.


- SS answer.


<b>4. While-speaking</b>


- Let ss read the questions.


- T gives information.



- Let ss practice: ss ask and
answer the questions.


- Ss use the information in the
boxes to practice.


- T gets some groups to practice
aloud.


5. <b>Post-speaking</b>


- Let ss use the information
about their real home village to
practice.


- Get some pairs to practice
aloud.


<b>6. Home work</b>


Where is Ba’s village?


How did Ba and his family go to the
village?


T: Where is our village?


SS: It’s to the earth of Ninh Binh town.
T: How far is it from the town?



a. Work with a partner. Read the
questions. Then play the role of A and B,
ask and answer about your partner’s
home village using the information in
the boxes.


1. It’s to the earth of Ninh Binh town.
2. It’s about 20 km from the town.
3. By bus.


4. About haft an hour.


5. They plant rice, vegetables and race
cattle.


6. Yes, there is a river flowing across the
village.


S1: Where is your home village?
S2: It’s to the south of the city.
S1: How far is it from the city?
S2: It’s about 30 km.


S1: How can you get there?
S2: By bus.


S1: How long does it take you to get
there?


S2: About 1 hour.



S1: What do people do for a living in
your village?


S2: They plan rice and vegetables.
S1: Does your village have a river?


S2: Yes, there is a river flowing across
the village.


b. Now ask and answer about your real
home village.


Ex: 4. 5. P 21, 22


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(96)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=96>

Date: 2/10



Period 16


Unit 2

A trip to the countryside



Lesson 3: Listen



<b>A. Objective</b>



- Practice listening about a village with places: gas, station, pond (ao), and
highway.


<b>B. Teaching aids</b>




- Pictures, color chalk book, tape, cassette …

<b>C. Produce</b>



<b>1. Warm up</b>


- T greets.


<b>2. Check old lesson.</b>


- T gets a student to talk about
his (her) home village.


<b>3. Pre teaching</b>


- Let ss playing game. “Slap the
board”


- T explains the content and the
of the exercise.




- Listen to the tape.


<b>4. While-listening</b>


- Let ss works in groups.


- T explants new words.



- Let ss listen and match.


- Ss match the place with the
letter.


- T gets some ss to give answer.


- T corrects.




-5. <b>Post-listening</b>


- Talk about your village.


<b>6. Home work</b>


airport
gas station
pond


highway number 1
banyan tree


store


bamboo forest


Dragon Bridge (cau rong)
parking lot (bai do xe)


Key


A; banyan tree
D; Dragon Bridge
G; pond


B; airport
E; gas station
H; bamboo forest
C; highway number 1
f; store


I; parking lot
c,d,e,f,g,b,h,i,a.


<b>7. Sum - up experience</b>.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(97)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=97>

Period 17


Unit 3

A trip to the countryside



Lesson 4: Read



<b>A. Objective</b>



- Get more knowledge about American farmers and their life.

<b>B. Teaching aids</b>



- Teaching plan, book, picture …

<b>C. Produce</b>




<b>1. Warm up</b>


- Greet.


<b>2.Check old lesion</b>.


- T gets a student to talk about
life in a village.


<b>3. Pre reading.</b>


- Playing game.


- Playing “matching game”


<b>4. While-reading</b>


- T asks some questions, ss
answer.


- T lets ss read the text.


- Let ss do the exercises.


<b>5. Post-speaking</b>


tree, paddy, bank, home, bamboo, field,
forest, fresh, banyan, air, river, village



- What trees/ vegetable do
farmers in America grow?


- What animals do they raise?


- What do they usually eat?


a, Match the words.
Maize – corn


Feed – give food to eat


grocery store – where people buy food
and small things


part time – shorter or less than standard
time


collect – bring things together


Vocabulary
maize


work part time
part time
grocery store
hamburger
hot dog
exchange



corn
lam them
1/2 thoi gian
cua hang tap hoa
banh mi chon kep
thit


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(98)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=98>

- Get some ss to practice.


- Let ss read the text and
complete the summary.


<b>6. Home work</b>


2. farmer


3. works part time at a grocery store
4. Peter


5. Sam
6. after
7. farm


8. they watch
9. basball
ex. 4.5 p.21, 22


7. <b>Sum - up experience</b>.


Date: 10/10


Period: 18


Unit 3

A trip to the countryside



Lesson 5: Write



<b>A. Objective</b>



- Write a passage about a picnic – a country picnic.

<b>B. Teaching aids</b>



- Teaching plan, book, chalks, pictures …

<b>C. Produce</b>



<b>1. Warm up</b>


- Greet.


<b>2.Check old lesion</b>.


- T gets a student to do exercise
9 p.24


<b>3. Pre writing</b>


- T shows pictures and asks. Ss
answer.





<b>-4. While- writing</b>


- Let ss look at part a then read
the outline.


- Read the passage, note the
underline words.


What are they doing?


picnic site (địa điểm tổ chức picnic)
lay out (sua soan)


blind man’s buff


It was a beautiful day. I and my friends
decided to go on a picnic.


We took a bus to the countryside and
then we walk about 20 minutes to the
picnic site next to a river. We put down
the blankets and laid out the food.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(99)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=99>

- T gives some new words.


<b>5. Post-writing</b>


- Let ss play game “What song is
it?”



6. <b>Home work</b>


<b>7. sum up experiments.</b>


<b>Week 10</b>



Date: 11/10
Period: 19


Unit 3

A trip to the countryside



Lesson6: Language Focus



<b>A. Objective</b>



- Practice: modal could with wish, the past simple with wish, preposition of
time, adverb clause of result.


<b>B. Teaching aids</b>



- Teaching plan, book, chalks …

<b>C. procedure</b>



<b>1. Warm up</b>


- greet


<b>2. Check old lesion</b>


- Talk about your picnic.



<b>3. Pre-teaching</b>


- T talk about the present wish


- Let ss do the exercises.


- T corrects.


- Let ss practice.


<b>4. While teaching</b>


1. What do these people wish?
Write the sentences.


S + wish + N/ pron. + Vp.s


b, Hoa wishes she could visit her
parents.


2. Work with a partner.
b, on


c, between
d, till
e, after
f, up to


3. Complete the sentences with


on, at, in, for.


preposition
a, on


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(100)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=100>

- Practice


- T explains some new words
and let ss practice.


<b>5. Post teaching.</b>


15 minutes text


6. <b>Sum up experiment.</b>


e, in
f, at


4. Match the half sentences.
Then write sentences in your
exercise book.


2 – a: 3 – d: 4 – b: 5 – c


I. Complete the sentences with a suitable
preposition.


1. We don have lesson …. on Sunday.
2. Tuan usually gets up … 5 o’clock …


the morning.


3. It is often cold … the winter.


4. We have summer holiday … June …
September.


II. Rewrite the sentences.
1. I can’t fly.


+ I wish …


2. It rains very often here, and we
don’t like that.


+ We wish …


Date: 14/10



Period: 20


Unit 4

Learning a foreign language



Lesson 1: Getting started, listen and read



<b>A. Objective</b>



- By the end of the lesion ss will be able to report a reported speech.

<b>B. Teaching aids</b>




- Tape, cassette, Pictures, color chalk, teaching plan…

<b>C. Produce</b>



<b>1. Warm up</b>


- Greet


<b>2. Check old lesson</b>


- Check ss preparation.


<b>3. Pre teaching</b>


- Lets ss read the sentences and
check things with they do.
Then write more sentences
with they do or want to do.


- Get some ss to read the
sentences.


Check ss’ preparation


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(101)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=101>

<b>4. While-teaching</b>


- Listen.


- Listen and find the main idea
of the conversation.



- Ss practice the dialogue.


- Let ss read the dialogue again
and see what exactly the
examiner asks Lan.


5. <b>Post-teaching</b>


- Ss answer the questions.


- T corrects.


- How to change a direct in to
an indirect?




<b>-6. Home work</b>


2. Listen and read.


Lan is talking to Paola about the oral
examination she had has.


Vocabulary
examiner


aspect of learning
English



written examination
oral ..


giám khảo
kỹ năng học
tiếng Anh
kì thi viết


.. nói


a. Practice the dialogue.


b. Answer: What exactly did the
examiner ask Lan?


1, 2, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 14
Grammar
* Conditional sentences.
(The first condition sentence)


“If” clause


Simple present present of modal + Main clause
V


The first conditional refers to the future.
It is used when there is a possibility that
the if event might happen.



Ex. If it rains this afternoon, I’ll stay at
home and watch TV.


* Direct and reported questions.
+ Reported: She asked me What my
name was.


+ “Direct speech” thuật lại nguyên văn
lời ngời nói, và đợc đặt trong dấu ngoặc
kép.


- She asked, “What is your
name?”


+ “Reported speech” là lời nói đợc thuật
lại với ý của ngời thuật nhng vẫn giữ
nguyên nội dung.


- She asked me what my name
was.


Preposition change
Direct speech


I


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(102)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=102>

<b>7. Sum - up experience.</b>


<b>WEEK 11</b>




<b>Unit 4 : learning a foreign language</b>


Period 21 – getting stared + listen and read



Date of planning :
A. objective :


<b>1. Knowledge: </b>By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know some words and
experience in learning English.


- Know how to change a direct speech into indirect speech


<b>2. Skill : </b>Listening, Speaking and Reading.


B. <b>teaching aids: </b>pictures, tapes, chalks and book


<b>c. procedure:</b>


1. Warm up :


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities


Getting started



T: introduce the topic of the unit and ask
ss to discuss the experience in learning a
foreign language . give the question to
discuss


Ss: listen and then discuss in group, basing


on some ideas given in the books


T: call ss to present before the class
Ss; raise the hand to do


T: give more ideas on this topic


* How do you learn and improve your
English?


- Do you often watch English TV
programs?


- Do you like listening to English songs?
- Do you read short stories in English?
… so on


* Why do you choose that way to learn
English?


2. Presentation:


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities


Listen and read



T: ask ss to read the questionnaire of oral
examination.


Ss; read the questions quickly



T: ask ss to read the dialogue in silence and
find out the direct questions in the


dialogue and then compare with the
indirect questions in the questionnaire
Ss: listen and do as the request


T: help ss to know some new words
Ss; listen and note down


T: call ss to give their comparison
Ss: listen and do as the request.
T: explain how to change the direct
questions into indirect ones


Ss: listen carefully


T: allow ss time to practice the dialogue
Ss; read the dialogue in pair


T: call some pairs to read before the class


* Now you read the questionnaires of
the oral examination


* New words :
+ college (n)
+ aspect ( n)
+ stage (n)



+ oral examination (n)
+ candidate ( n)


* After ss finish their checking , call
some ss to give their answers out
1 ; 2; 6 ; 7 ; 8 ; 9 ; 10 ; 14.


* How to change a direct question into
an indirect one


eg : “ What’s you name ?”


She asked me what my name was.
eg : “ Where do you live ?”


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(103)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=103>

Ss; raise the hand to do

<b>3. Consolidation:</b>



Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: ask ss questions and ss answer directly.


Ss; do as the request


T: call ss to report those questions
Ss:


+ What is your address?
+ How do you go to school?
+ Do you often listen to music?


+ Do you play sports after school?
+ How do you learn English?


<b>4. Homework:</b>


T: ask ss to do exercises in the workbook. Prepare the next lesson “Unit 4: speak”
Ss: listen and note down


<b>D. remark:</b>


__________________________________________________________________
__


<b>Unit 4 : learning a foreign language</b>


Period 22– speak



Date of planning :


<b>a. objective : </b>


<b>1. Knowledge: </b>By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know how to persuade
someone to do some thing.


<b>2. Skill : </b>Listening and Speaking


B. <b>teaching aids: </b>Extra board, chalks and book


<b>c. procedure:</b>



1. Warm up :


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: greet ss and give questions to lead


into the topic of the speaking


Ss; listen and ask the questions given


* You are awarded a scholarship to attend a
course of English abroad. Which country
will you go? Why ?


2. Pre- speaking:


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: introduce the situation of speaking


Ss: listen


T: guide ss know how to perpuade
someone


Ss: listen


T: ask ss to read the information about
three schools given in the book


Ss; read



T: show some new words from it.
Ss: note down.


T: ask ss to reread the information
Ss: read the information again.
T; make an example to show how to
persuade other two patterns to agree to
choose the same school .


* Thu, Tam and Kim are awarded a


scholarship to attend an English language
Summer course abroad. Each of them
would like to study in a different school
and country.


* What do you say to persuade someone ?
- I think we should …….


- Why don’t we ……….


- What do you think about …….
- Let’s ………


- If we go to ……….., we can ……
* New words :


- dormitory on campus.(n)
- Western culture (n)
- reputation (n)


- scenery (n)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(104)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=104>

3. Speaking


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T; devide the class into group of three


people and let them work freely.
Ss: work in group


T: observe ss to do and go around to help
weak students. Then call some group to
present before the class


Ss: raise the hand to do


T: give some cues to help them do fluently.


* Suggested dialogue :


Thu : I think we should go to the


Brighton Language center in the United
Kingdom. The school has an excellent
reputation


Kim : I disagree because the course
lasts only six weeks.


Tam : why don’t we go to the Brisbane


Institute of English Australia. If we go
there, we can stay withnan Australian
family.


<b>4. Post </b>–<b> speaking:</b>


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: ask ss to discuss to persuade others to


choose which high school to attend
Ss: discuss


*Which high school will you choose to
attend? Try to persuade others to
choose the same school as you.


<b>5. Homework:</b>


T: write your ideas of choosing the high school to attend. Prepare the next lesson “
Unit 4 ; listen”


Ss: listen and note down


<b>D. remark :</b>


Week 12



<b>Unit 4 : learning a foreign language</b>


Period 23 – listen




Date of planning :


<b>A. objective : </b>


<b>1. Knowledge: </b>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to improve their listening
to choose the true or false sentences.


<b>2. Skill : </b>Listening comprehesion


B. <b>teaching aids: </b> tapes, chalks and book


<b>c. procedure:</b>


1. Warm up :


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: greet ss and ask them to discuss what


skills there are in learning English.
Ss: discuss


T: call ss to say and help ss to know some
new words mentioned in the tapescript


+ How many skills are there in learning
English ? What are they ?


+ Which is the most difficult skill?
+ What do you learn in English ?


- Speaking


- reading
- listening
- writing
- grammar


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(105)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=105>

2. Pre- listening:


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: introduce the situation of the tapescript


and the task they have to do after listening
Ss: listen carefully.


* Nga is talking to Kate about her
studying English in London. Listen to
the conversation and check the boxes
and correct the false sentences . now you
can guess before you listen to the


tapescript.


3. Listening


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T; play the tape for the first time


Ss: listen to know the content of the
tapescript without writing



T: let ss listen twice more to check the true
and false sentences


Ss: listen and check


T: call ss to give their checking
Ss: raise the hand to do


T: call others to remark and play the tape
again to give the correct answer.


Ss: listen and note down


T: ask ss to corect the false sentences
Ss: listen and correct the false sentences
T: remark and corect the mistakes


<b>* Answer key :</b>


a)
b) true


c) False. She works for an international
bank in Ha Noi.


d) true


e) False. Her listening is terrible. ( This
is her biggest problem. People talk very


quickly and she can’t understand them.


<b>4. Post </b>–<b> listening:</b>


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T; ask ss to work in group to discusswith


the questions given
Ss; work in group


- What aspect of learning English don’t
you like ? Why not ?


- Are you good at listening/ speaking ...?
- Which skill are you good at ?


- What can you do to improve your
listening / speaking …?


<b>5. Homework:</b>


T: ask ss to write a passage about the topic “ What can you do to improve four
skills in learning English ?”. prepare the next lesson “ Unit 4 : Read”


Ss: listen and note down


<b>D. remark :</b>


<b>__________________________________________________________________</b>
<b>__</b>



<b>Unit 4 : learning a foreign language</b>


Period 24 – read



Date of planning :


<b>A. objective : </b>


<b>1. Knowledge: </b>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to improve their scanning
to get information from the advertisements.


<b>2. Skill : </b>Reading comprehension


B. <b>teaching aids: </b> subordinate board, tapes, chalks and book


<b>c. procedure:</b>


1. Warm up :


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(106)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=106>

T; greet ss to call some students to say
something about learning English before
the class


Ss: raise the hand to say


T: ask some ss to hand in their writing
exercise done at home to mark


Ss: hand in the exercise



2. Pre- reading:


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: introduce the topic of the lesson and


give some questions to lead into the
content of the advertisements


Ss: listen and think to answer


T: ask ss to scan the advertisements to get
some new words from them.


Ss: listen and note new words down .
T: use some techniques to show new words
Then help ss to read the words well


Ss: listen and read after the teacher.


- There are some advertisements for
English courses. You will read and get
the information from them.


+ Do you go to English evening calss ?
+ Have you ever read any


advertisements for English courses ?
+ What do they say ?



- Now you scan the advertisements in
the book to underline some new words.
+ beginner (n)


+ intermediate (adj)
+ advanced ( adj )


+ well – qualified (adj )
+ tuition (n)


+ academy (n)


3. Reading


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: ask ss to read the advertisements to fill


the information in the table


Ss: read and fill in the table with the
information. Then compare the key with
each other.


T: call some students to show their answer
key before the class.


Ss: raise the hand to give the answers.
Others listen and remark.


T: remark and give the correct


information


Ss: note down


T: ask ss to read Mr Lam’s notes. Work
inpair to discuss andchoose the most
suitable school for him and give the
reasons.


Ss: discuss in pair


T: call some pairs to present befoere the
class


Ss: raise the hand to do.


Ex a):


Note down the information about the
English classes from the advertisements
1. Academy of language:


- morning/ afternoon / evening
- advanced


- first week of Nivember
2. Foreign Language Council
- morning and evening


- beginner / intermediate


- 3rd<sub> November</sub>


3. New English Institute :
- afternoon / evening / weekend.
- beginner


- ( today )


Ex b): Foreign Language Council is the
most suitable for Mr Lam.


<b>4. Post </b>–<b> reading:</b>


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T; ask some students in the class to be in the


role of interviewers to ask others who want
to learn English among three centers given
Ss; play the role of interviewers to ask and
others listen and answer.


Eg :


Interviewer : Do you want t improve
you English at the language center?
S1: Yes, I’d like to improve my speakig
skill


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(107)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=107>

( make an emxample for students to know



how to do) choose?S1: i think I’ll choose New English


<i><b>Institute.</b></i>


Interviewer : Why do yu choose it ?
S1: because they offer weekend classes
for beginners.


<b>4. Homework:</b>


T: ask ss to answer the following questions at home
- Which skills in English are you good at?


- Which one are you bad at ?
- What can you do to improve it ?


Prepare the next lesson “ Unit 4 : Write”
Ss: listen and note down


<b>D. remark :</b>


Week 13



<b>Unit 4 : learning a foreign language</b>


Period 25 – write



Date of planning :


<b>A. objective : </b>



<b>1. Knowledge: </b>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to improve their ability of
writing a letter to supply the information


<b>2. Skill : </b>Writing


B. <b>teaching aids: </b> chalks , extra boards and book


<b>c. procedure:</b>


<b>1. Warm up :</b>


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T; call some students to answer the


questions given in the last period
Ss; raise the hand to do


T: give some questions to lead into the
topic of the lesson


Ss: listen and think to answer


- Have you ever written a letter ?
- What is a letter of inquiry ?


- How will you write it if you want to
attend an English course ?


2. Pre- writing:



Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T; present the letter given in the book as an


example and give some questions about it
Ss: listen and think to answer


T: ask ss t read the letter quickly and then
give the information of the letter in


summary


Ss: do as the request


T: guide ss how to write a formal letter
And give some new words


Ss: listen and note down the new words.


- Who wrote this letter ?
- Who was the recipient ?


- How many parts are there in a formal
letter?


- What is the letter about ?


* Inforamtion in a letter of inquiry
- address of the recipient



- address of the writer
- greeting


- reason t write the letter
- sentences used to require
- closing


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(108)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=108>

3. Writing


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: ask ss to read and choose ne of three


advertisements in the part : Read, the write
aletter to require the center to supply the
information about the English course.
Ss: listen carefully.


T: then ask ss to read the outline to know
how to write a letter of inquiry.


Ss: read the outline and apply to write a
letter.


T: call ss to read their letters aloud before
the class


Ss: raise the hand to read


* Now you read the advertisements in
the part “Read” and choose one center to


write a letter of inquiry for more


information about the English course to.
* But before writing, you must read the
outline given carefully.


( <i>outline in the book )</i>


<b>4. Post </b>–<b> writing:</b>


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: ask ss to read the letters again and


exchange their own letters each other to
correct themselves


Ss; do as the request


T: collect some letters from students to
correct the mistakes


Ss: listen carefully.


T: call ss to give the form of an inquiry
letter again


Ss; listen and recall to say


* Form of an inquiry letter :



<b>5. Homework:</b>


T: ask ss to write a letter to other center of English language. Prepare the next
lesson


“ Unit 4 : Language focus”
Ss: listen and note down .


<b>D. remark :</b>


Unit 4 : learning a foreign language



Period 26 – language focus



Date of planning :
A. <b>objective : </b>


<b>1. Knowledge: </b>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know how to use
modal verbs with <i>if </i>, direct and reported speech “ here / now in reported speech
and reported questions”.


<b>2. Skill : </b>Use grammatical points in communication and doing exercises
B. <b>teaching aids: </b> chalks and book.


<b>c. procedure:</b>


1. Warm up :


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: greet ss and lead into the content of the



lesson.
Ss: listen


* You have already known some
grammar points, today we will revise
those grammar points.


<b>2. Revision and 3. Practice: </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(109)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=109>

Activity 1 : Exercise 1.



T: explain the task of exercise. Then make
an example with a good students


Ss: listen carefully.


T: request ss to do this exercise in pair
Ss: work in pair


T: call some pairs to present before the
class


Ss: raise the hand to do.


T: call others students to remark and then
give correct answers


Ss: listen and remark.



* <i>Complete the sentences. Use the modal </i>
<i>verbs and the information in the box.</i>


eg :


S1: I want to speak English well.


T: What must you do if you want to speak
English well.?


S1: if I want to speak English well, I must
practise speaking English everyday.


* Answer key:


c) if you want to loose weight, you should
do exercises.


d) if he doesn’t come soon, he might miss
the train


e) if you want to get well, you ought to
stay in bed.


f) you must do your homework if you
want ot go out.


Acticity 2 : Exercise 2.



T: call ss to explain how to change the


tense and adverbs from direct sentences
into reported sentences


Ss: answer


T: ask ss to discuss inpair to complete the
table given in the book


Ss: discuss to complete the table.
T: remark and give the correct answers
Ss: note down


Ex 2: <i> Complete </i>the<i> table </i>:


Direct speech Reported speech
- Present simple


- present


progressive tense
- future simple
- can / may
- must
- this/ these
- now
- today
- tomorrow


- past simple
- Past progressive


tense.


- future in the past
- could / might
- had to


- that / those
- then


- that day


- the following day


<b>Activity 3 : Report statement</b>


T: introduce the situation of the exercise
and then ask ss to change into reported
speech after giving an example


Ss: apply to do


T: call some pairs ; one asks and the other
answers


Ss: raise the hand to do


T: remark and give the correct answers
Ss: listen and note down.


* Change into repotted speech :


“ I’m happy to meet you’.


à Aunt Xuan said she was happy to meet
you.


“ I live in Kim Son ,” Hoa said


à Hoa said (that) she lived in Kim Son.
* Answer key :


a) Uncle Hung said that birthday cake
was delicious.


b) Miss Nga said She loved those roses.
c) Cousin Mai said he was having a


wonderful time there.


d) Mr Chi said he would go to Hue the
following day


e) Mrs Hoa said she might have a new
job.


f) Mr said he had to leave then.


<b>Activity 4 : Reported questions</b>


T: explain the task of the exercise and
then give examples to explain how to


change direct question into reported
questions.


Ss: listen carefully .


T: ask ss to work in pair to change the


* Change direct questions into reported
questions.


Eg :


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(110)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=110>

questions given
Ss: work in pair


T: call some pairs to present before the
class


Ss: raise the hand to do


T: remark and give the corretc answers
Ss: note down


à she asked me what I did.
* Answer key :


a) she asked me how old I was


b) she asked me if my school was near
there.



c) she asked me what the name of my
school was.


d) she asked me if I went ot school by
bicycle.


e) she asked me which grade I was in
f) she asked me if I could use a computer
g) she asked me why I want that job.
h) she asked me when my school


vacation started.


<b>3. Homework:</b>


T: ask ss to complete all the exercises in the work book, revise the knowledge they
have already learnt for the coming test.


Ss: listen and note down


<b>D. remark :</b>


<b>Week 14</b>


<b>Period 27 : The second english written test</b>


Date of planning :


A. <b>Objective</b> : help ss to know how well they have learned English so as for


them to fill their blank of knowledge. Help the teacher to appreciate the
capability of students in learning English.


<b>B. Preparation:</b>


1. Teacher : prepare the knowledge used in the test and type the test papers
2. Student: revise the knowledge for the test


<b>C. procedure: </b>


<b>1.</b> Warm up :: greeting and checking the attention of the students


<b>2.</b> Hand out : deliver the test paper to each student


<b>3.</b> Observation :


<b>4.</b> Hand in : ask ss to hand in the test paper when te time finishes


<b>5.</b> Remark and give assigment:
Content of the test


<b>Name : </b>………. Class : …. Mark :
....


……


I. <b>Circle the best option to complete the following sentences: (2m)</b>


1. I don’t know how to swim. I wish I ………… how to swim.



a. know b. known c. to know d. knew


2. What does “mother tongue” mean?


a. your mother’s tongue b. body language c. your native language
d. foreign language


3. “ Where do you live ?,” the examiner asks Lan.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(111)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=111>

c. The examiner asked me where I lived d. The examiner asks Lan
where she lived


4. The person who is examined at exams is called an ………


a. examiner b. examinees c. examiners d.


examinee


5. When we reach ………… Ha Noi, we will phone you.


a. to b. in c. into d. 


6. My father often goes to work ……… breakfast.


a. after b. before c. for d. during


7. We ……….. at the nearest village before sunset.


a. came b. arrived c. went d.



reached


8. We’ll play tennis and ……….. we’ll have lunch.


a. so b. so that c. then d.


after.


<b>II. Circle the word in each group that has the underlined part pronounced </b>
<b>differently from the rest (1 m ).</b>


1. A. campus B. relax C. locate D. fashion


2. A. qualify B. baggy C. grocery D. scenery


3. A. gather B. there C. ethnic D. although


4. A. ploughed B. published C. ordered D. prayed


5. A. exchange B. reach C. chance D. champagne


<b>III. Fill in each blank with a suitable word from the box. Do not use the same </b>
<b>word more than once. ( 2,5 m)</b>


college difficult evening hard
language


newspaper studies subjects
teenagers useful





Every year many people in the world learn English. Some of them are young
children. Others are (1) …………. Many are adults. Some learn at school, others
learn in (2) …………. classes. A few learn English by themselves or just by


hearing the (3) ……… on television or among their friends. Most people must
work (4) ………… …. to learn English. Why do these people want to learn


English? It isn’t (5) ………. to answer that question. Young children learn
English at school because it is one of their (6) ………… . many adults learn
English because it is (7) … ………. .. for their work. Teenagers often learn English
because it is a (8) …………. , because some of their books are in English at (9)


... . or university. Others learn English because they want to read (10)
… …


or magazines in English.
…………


<b>IV. Write a complete letter with the words given. ( 2,5 )</b>
<i>Dear Sir,</i>


<b>1.</b> I / see / school’s advertisement / TV / last night.


………
..


………



<b>2.</b> I / interested / learn English / and / I / like / information / school.


………
..




<b>3.</b> I / study / English / four years / but / want / improve / speaking / listening / skill.
………
..




<b>4.</b> I / be / very grateful / if / you / send / details / courses / fees.


………
.


……


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(112)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=112>

………
.


………


<b>V. Listen the conversation between a tourist and the officer and write the </b>
<b>correct information. (2 m)</b>


1. The Royal Pavilion is an ……… and ………….. building.
2. The ……… …. .. bus goes straight there.


3. It takes ………., so it is not far.


4. The building is open from ……….., including ………..
5. The ticket to get in the Pavilion costs …………. for adults and ………
for children.


<i> (Address to contact : Phat Diem A Secondary </i>
<i>school . Email : www. vhq. com ) </i>


The end
Period 28 : the test correction
Date of planning :


A. <b>Objective</b> : help ss to improve their skill of doing a written test and
consolidate their knowledge after they finished their test


B. <b>Preparation</b>: prepare the mistakes in the test and what knowledge
students have to focus on


C. <b>Procedure</b>:


1. Warm up : greeting and return their own test papers


2. Remark : give the mistakes they had in the test and what knowledge they
have to consolidate


3. Give the answer key:
Answer key of the test


I. <b>Circle the best option to complete the following sentences : ( 2m )</b>



1. d. knew


2. c. your native language


3. b. The examiner asked Lan where she lived
4. d. examinee


5. d. 
6. a. after
7. b. arrived
8. c. then


<b>II. Circle the word in each group that has the underlned part pronounced </b>
<b>differently from the rest (1 m ).</b>


1. C. locate
2. A. qualify
3. C. ethnic
4. B. published
5. D. champagne


III. Fill in each blank with a suitable word from the box. Do not use the same word more than
once. ( 2,5 m)


9. college 5. difficult 2. evening 4. hard 8. language
10. newspaper 3. studies 6. subjects 1. teenagers 7. useful


<b>IV. Write a complete letter with the words given . ( 2,5 )</b>
<i>Dear Sir,</i>



1. I saw your school’s advertisement on TV last night


2. I am interested in learning English and I would like to have some information
about your school.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(113)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=113>

4. I will be very grateful if you send me details of courses and fees
5. Look forward to hearing fromyou soon


<b>V. Listen the conversation between a tourist and the officer and write the </b>
<b>correct information. (2 m)</b>


1. old ; famous
2. 14


3. about 10 minutes


4. 10 a.m to 4 p.m every day ; weekend
5. 200 pounds ; 50 p


Tapescript:


Tourist : Good morning. Could you suggest what we old visit here? Are there any
old


buildings, for example?


Officer : Well, there is the Royal Pavilion. It is famous
Tourist : That sounds fine. How do I get there ?



Officer :Take the number 14 bus from here ; it goes straight there
Tourist : How often do the buses run ?


Officer : At quarter t and quarter past the hour
Tourist : How long does it take ?


Officer :Oh, it only takes about 10 minutes, so it is not far.
Tourist : Can you tell me when the Pavilion open ?


Officer : Every day, including weekends. Opening hours are 10 a.m to 4 p.m.
Tourist : Is it expensive to get in ?


Officer : No, not very, It costs 200 pounds for adults and 50p for children.
Tourist : That’s a lot. We have two children


Officer : Well, why don’t you get a family ticket ? That is cheaper
Tourist : That’s a good idea. Thank you very much.


Officer : You’re welcome. Goodbye.


<b>Week 15</b>



<b>Period 29 unit 5 : the media </b>



Lesson 1: getting started & listen and read



Date of planning:


<b>A. Objective</b>:



1. Knowledge : By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to get acquainted with
the new lesson " The media". Ss will know the main conception of the lesson
through the means of communication such as : <i>newspaper, magazines, T.V, </i>
<i>interactive TV</i>.


2. Skill : improve their pair work and group work. Improve listening and
reading.


<b>B. Teaching aids</b>: book, chalk, poster, tape and cassette


<b>C. Proceduce</b>:


<b>1.</b> <b>Warm up</b>:


Teacher’s and students’ activities Content of the activities
T: greet ss and find the words involved in


means of communication
Ss: listen and do as the request


* Find the words that involved in means
of communication.


<b>2.</b> <b>Presentation </b>:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(114)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=114>

<b>Activity 1 : Getting started </b>


T: lead into the lesson with some
questions



Ss: listen and answer the questions


T: ask ss to work in pair to discuss about
their favorite activities in their free time
Ss: listen and do s the request


T; call some pairs to present before the
class


Ss: raise the hand to do


T; remark and correct the common
mistakes


Ss: listen and note down


+ Do you often read newspaper? Why ?
+ What about TV or radio?


+ Do you like them ?
+ Are they useful ?


+ How were our lives if there were no
means of communication ?


+ Among them which is your favorite
activity in your free time ?


+ How many hours a day do you often
spend watching T.V



* As you know nowadays, media has
become very popular in our life. In Unit
5 we will learn about this interesting
topic. First you work in pair to ask and
answer questions about your favarite
activities mebtioned in the <b>Getting </b>
<b>started.</b> See example in the book.


<b>Activity 2 : Listen and read</b>


T: give questions to lead into the content
of the passage


Ss: listen. T: introduce the topic of the
passage with some questions


Ss: listen carefully to know the main
idea of the passage


T: show some new words from the
passage. Hold a game <i>Rub out and </i>


<i>remember</i> to help ss remember the words
Ss: listen and note down new words
T: read new words in chorus


T: playh the tape twice
Ss: listen carefully



T: guide ss to know the next task
Ss: listen and conduct their duties
T; ask ss to compare their completion
Ss: do as the request .


T: call some ss to give tehir answers with
the explanation


Ss: raise the hand to do .
T: give correct answer
Ss: note down.


T: ask ss to read the passage again in
order to answer the questions given.
Ss; listen and think to answer


T: call some ss to answer the questions
before the class


Ss: raise the hand to answer
T; give correct answers
Ss: listen and note down.


T: call ss to read the paragraghs again.
Ss: raise the hand to do


T: call ss to translate into Vietnamese


. + Do you know how people



communicated in the time without T.V
or newspapers or magazines ?


+ What kind of media is the most
familiar to you


+ Which one is popular in Viet Nam
à Now you will know from the passage
below


* New words :


+ Crier (n) + remote conntrol (n)
+ Thanks to + live show


+ latest : + Game show
+ a variety of + talk show
+ Interactive T.V + benefit
+ bring about


* Now you read the passage again and
complete the table. Fill in the passage
letters in which the facts and events
mentioned.


<i>Answer key :</i>


1. D 2. B
3. B 4. C
5. D 6. A


* Answer the questions :


1. A town crier was a person whose job
was to go through city streets ringing
a bell to shout the latest news as he
was walking.


2. The <i>Kien Thuc Ngay Nay</i> is one of
the most popular magazines and is
widely read by both teenagers and
adults.


3. People can get the latest information
and enjoy interesting and


inexpensive


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(115)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=115>

Ss: try to translate


T: allow ss time to work in pair to ask
and answer the questions 4 and 5
Ss: work in pair to do


T; call some pairs to present their duties
before the class


Ss: raise the hand to do


questions 4 and 5:
+ short stories :


+ series :


+ sports column :
+ comics :
+ documentary :


<b>3.</b> <b>Consolidation </b>:


Teacher’s and students’ activities Content of the activities
T: call ss to reread the new words


mentioned in the lesson
Ss: do as the request.


<b>4.</b> <b>Home assignment:</b>


T: request ss to summarize the main development of the Media in Viet Nam
Ss; listen and note down


<b>D. remark :</b>


<b>Period 30 unit 5 : the media</b>



Lesson 2: speak



Date of planning:


<b>A.</b> <b>Objective</b>:


1. <b>Knowledge</b> : By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to widen the topic of


the Media. They w ill know more programs on T.V nowadays


2. <b>Skill</b> : improve their pair work and group work. Improve speaking skill.


<b>B.</b> <b>Teaching aids</b>: book, chalk and a board with programs


<b>C.</b> <b>Proceduce:</b>


<b>1.</b> <b>Warm up</b>:


Teacher’s and students’ activities Content of the activities
T: greet ss and call one student to say the


development of the Media
Ss: raise the hand to do
T: hold a game "<i>Netwworks"</i>


Ss: participate in the game


* Summarize the dewelopment of the
Media.


* Write the names of programs you know


<b>2.</b> pre speaking


Teacher’s and students’ activities Content of the activities
T: introduce some other programs on TV


nowadays.



Ss: listen and note down.


T: ask ss which one is their favorite
program.


Ss: listen and answer


T: read the dialogue and tehn extract the
tag questions from it to revise


Ss: listen and note down.


* Other TV programs :
+ Folk Music


+ Cartoon


+ Literature and Art
+ News


+ Safe traffic news
+ Dramar


+ Documentary


+ Health for everyone
+ Children's corner
+ Game shows
+ Wheel of fortune


+ The price is right
+ Catch phrase


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(116)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=116>

T: make examples for each type
Ss: listen carefully.


T; call others ss to make more examples
Ss: raise the hand to do


type 1 :


( positive statement , negative tag ? )
eg : you like watching sports , don't you?
type 2 :


( negative statement , positive tag ? )
eg : you don't like foreign film , do you?


<b>3.</b> speaking


Teacher’s and students’ activities Content of the activities
T: ask ss to practise the dialogue between


Lien and Trung


Ss; work in piar to read the dialogue
T; call some paiors to present before the
class


Ss: raise the hand to do


T; correct the sound mistakes
Ss; listen carefully.


T; guide ss to make similar dialogues in
pair, basing on the dialogue between
Lien and Trung and the information
table.


Ss: listen and work in pair to make
similar dialogues


T: call some pairs to present their own
dialogues before the class


Ss; raise the hand to do


T: make a dialogue with a student
Ss: work with the teacher


T; focus on tag question.
Ss: listen carefully


* Practise the dialogue between Len and
Trung :


* Now base on the sample dialogue and
the inforamtion in the table you make
similar dialogues to talk about the
programs you like and dislike .



<b>4.</b> Post- speaking


Teacher’s and students’ activities Content of the activities
T: ask ss to complete the following


question tags


Ss: listen and do as the request
T: call ss to do


Ss: raise the hand to do


T; remark and give the correct answers
Ss; note down.


T: resay some names og programs they
have just learned


Ss; listen and resay


+ Ngoc Anh is not having dinner, …….?
+ You like coffee, ………..?


+ your mother enjoys watching TV, …?
+ He can speak English well,……. ?
+ She never goes to the movies, ………?
+ Let's invite him to the party, ……… ?
+ They will have a test tomorrow, …….?


<b>5. home assignment</b>



T: write 5 sentences for each type of tag questions. Learn names of programs by
heart Prepare the next lesson " Unit 5 : Listen "


Ss: listen and note down


<b>D.</b> remark:


__________________________________________________________________
___


<b>week 16</b>


<b>Period 31 unit 5 : the media </b>



Lesson 3: listen



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(117)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=117>

<b>A. Objective</b>:


<i><b>1.</b></i> <b>Knowledge :</b>By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know the main
inforamtion about the development of the means of communication such as


<i>printed newspaper, telegragh, radio , T.V …</i>


<i><b>2.</b></i> <b>Skill</b> : improve the listening comprehension. Complete the information in the
table.


<b>B. Teaching aids</b>: book, chalk, tape and cassette


<b>C. Proceduce</b>:



<b>1. Warm up</b>:


Teacher’s and students’ activities Content of the activities
T: greet and hold a game called <i>Noughts </i>


<i>and Crosses.</i>


Ss: participate in the game


* Noughts and Crosses games :


Cartoon Documentary Film


News Sports Drama


Informative Violent Boring


<b>2.</b> Pre – listening


Teacher’s and students’ activities Content of the activities
T: hold ss to work in pair to predict the


information <i>true or false</i>


Ss: listen and do as the request .
T: guide ss the duty they have to do
Ss: listen carefully.


* Discuss in pair about these means of


communication:


+ Printed newspaper:
+ Telegragh :


+ Radio and newsreels :


( about the date when they were born. )
* We are going to listen to a dialogue
about the brief history of some modern
forms of media. You listen to the tape
and fill in the table with the information
you hear. )


<b>3.</b> While – listening


Teacher’s and students’ activities Content of the activities
T: play the tape twice


Ss: listen and do the duty. Then compare
with the partner.


T: call some ss to present before the class
Ss: raise the hand to do .


T: play the tape again to give correct
answers


Ss: listen and note down.



T: explain some new wrds in the dialogue
Ss: listen and note down


* Listen and fill in the table :


<i>Answer key :</i>


a) the late 19th<sub> century</sub>
b) radio and newsreels
c) in the 1950s


d) the Internet.


<i>New words :</i>


+ assignment :
+ major force :
+ Journalism :


+ AD ( Latin anno domini )


<b>4. Post </b>–<b> listening</b>


T: Help ss play a game called “ <i>True / False Repetition Drill </i>”


+ The first printed newspaper appeared in China in the 7th<sub> century</sub>
+ The telegragh was invented in the early 19th<sub> century</sub>


+ Radio appeared in the early 20th<sub> century</sub>
+ T.V became popular in the 1950s



+ Newsreels appeared in the 1950s


Ss: listen and repeat the sentences with true information


T: ask ss to work in pair to ask and answer the date when these media was invented
Ss: listen and work in pair


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(118)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=118>

T: ask ss to summarize the content of the dialogue into a passage. Prepare the next
lesson “ Unit 5 : Read”


Ss: listen and note down


<b>D. Remark:</b>


__________________________________________________________________
___


<b>Period 32 unit 5 : the media </b>



Lesson 4: read



Date of planning:


<b>A. Objective</b>:


1. Knowledge :By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to get acquainted with
the modern means of communication that has greatly affected on the life : Internet.
From the passage Ss will be introduced some words mentioned in the topic such
as : surf the web, e-mail, chatting, forum, get access, time cnsuming …



2. Skill : Reading comprehension. Especially, ss will improve tehir guessing
words


<b>B. Teaching aids</b>: book, chalk, poster, cues and cassette with tape.


<b>C. Proceduce</b>:


<b>1. Warm up</b>:


Teacher’s and students’ activities Content of the activities


T: greet andcall ss to retell the class
the basic information on the


development of the Media
Ss: raise the hand to do .


T: ask ss to work in group to give the
ideas about the Internet


Ss: do as the request


T; call ss to say and then synthesize
those ideas


Ss: note them down.


* Tell the class the basic information
on the development of the Media


* Work in group to find the ideas
about the Internet :


+ It is widely developed


+ It is useful for education, transport,
science …


+ We can chat with the person who
lives far from us on the Internet.
+ It wastes time and costs money.
+ It offers large selection of
entertainment.


( so on ….. )


<b>2.</b> Pre – reading


Teacher’s and students’ activities Content of the activities
T: introduce the topic


Ss: listen.


T: use suitable techniques to introduce
some active words in the passage
Ss: listen and note down.


T: hold a game called<i> Slap the board</i>“ ”
Ss: take part in the game



T: introduce the context of the lesson and
the conception og “ Forum”


*As we know, the Internet has been a
very important form of media in our
modern life. However, we may not know
all its benefits. In today’s lesson, we will
study the benefits and the disadvantages
of the Internet.)


* New words :
+ surf the webs (n):
+ forum (n):


+ e-mail (n):
+ benefit (n):
+ get access (v) :
+ wander (v)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(119)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=119>

Ss: listen carefully * As you know, forum is a public
meeting where a certain topic is


discussed. Every participant can engage i
the discussion. A forum on the Internet is
similar. However, the participants don’t
meet in person. They post their ideas
through a main website or a mailing list.)


<b>3.</b> While – reading:



Teacher’s and students’ activities Content of the activities
T: guide ss to do the duty


Ss: listen and carry out the duty.


T: call ss to give their matching and then
give correct answer


Ss: note down.


T: now you read the passage again to
answer some questions given in the book
Ss: read in silence and think to answer.
Then compare the answers with the
partner.


T: call some ss to give their answers
before the class


Ss: raise the hand to do


T; call others to remark and then give the
correct answers


Ss: note down the correct answers


T: play the tape and then call ss to read
the passage aloud before the class
Ss: listen and raise the hand to read.
T: help ss to translate the passage into


Vietnamese


Ss: listen carefully.


* Now you read three responses in a
forum about the Internet. You scan the
text and match the following main ideas
and the responses.)


a) Students in the countryside can not
get access to the Internet.


b) Internet is a wonderful invention.
c) The internet can be limited in some


ways.


<i>Key </i>:


a) Response # 2
b) Response # 1
c) Response # 3


* Answer the questions


1. Sandra uses the Internet to get


information and to communicate with
her friends and relatives



2. Because she lives in the countryside
where the Internet is unavailable.
3. People use the Internet for education,


communication, entertainment and
commerce.


4. The benefits of the Internet: It is used
for multi-purposes: for getting


information, for education,


communication, entertainment an
commerce.


5. Yes, there some disadvantages. It is
time-consuming, costly, and


dangerous because of viruses and bad
programs.


* Read the passage :


<b>4. Post - reading</b>


Teacher’s and students’ activities Content of the activities
T: request ss to work in pair to discuss 2


last questions in the book.
Ss; listen and discuss in pair



T; call some pairs to present their ideas
before the class


Ss: raise the hand to do.


T; summarize the main ideas about the
Internet


Ss: listen.


* Discuss in pair :


+ Do you agree or disagree with the


responses?



<i>+ What is your response t this forum?</i>
<i>+ do you often use the internet? What do</i>
<i>you often do when you are on-line?</i>


<b>5. Home assignment:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(120)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=120>

<b>D. Remark:</b>


Week 17



<b>Period 33 unit 5 : the media </b>



Lesson 5: write




Date of planning:


<b>a. Objective</b>:


<b>1. Knowledge: </b>By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write a passage a but
he benefits and disadvantages of the Internet.Through it , Ss will get to know more
about the benefits of the Internet as well as its disadvantages.


<b> 2. Skill </b>: writing a composition the internet.
B. <b>Teaching aids</b>: book, chalk, poster,
C. <b>Proceduce</b>:


<b>1. Warm up</b>:


Teacher’s and students’ activities Content of the activities
T: greet and call one student to say the


benefits of the internet and one to write
new words on board.


Ss: raise the hand to do .


T; hold a game “ <i>Jumbled words</i>”
Ss; take part in the game


* Rearrange these jumbled words into
correct and meaningful words:


+ cessac ; furs ; danwer ; tainenmentter



<i>Key:</i>


access ; surf ; wander ; entertainment


<b>2.</b> Pre - writing:


Teacher’s and students’ activities Content of the activities
T: ask ss some questions about the form


of a passsage.


Ss: listen and answer


T: introduce the form of a passage
Ss: listen carefully


T: guide the duty they have to do
Ss: listen carefully.


+ Do you often write a passage ?
+ What is the form of a passage ?
* The form of a passage as following:


- Topic sentence



<i> + Supporting sentence 1</i>


<i> (+) Sub- supporting sentences</i>
<i> + Supporting sentence 2</i>



<i> (+) Sub-supporting sentences</i>
<i> …………..</i>


<i> + concluding sentence.</i>


( Note : connectors should be used


to connect the sentences )



* Now you read the forum on the Internet
in 5.Read. The write a passage about the
benefits of the Internet. You use the cues
in the book.


( You have to follow the form of a
passage tightly )


<b>3.</b> Writing:


Teacher’s and students’ activities Content of the activities
T: allow ss time to write


Ss: think to write the passage


T: ask ss to exchange the passage to
check with their partner


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(121)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=121>

Ss: do as the request


T: get some passage from ss to check
before the class



Ss; listen carefully.


<b>4. Post - writing</b>


Teacher’s and students’ activities Content of the activities
T: hold ss to play a game “o<i>rdering</i>”


Ss: take part in the game
T: call ss to give their answer
Ss: raise the hand to do


T; remark and give correc answer
Ss; note down.


T: call ss to resay the form of a passage
Ss: resay before the class


* Rearrange these sentences into a
suitable passage. ( on a poster )


1. First, there are lots of entertainments
in the city. A large number of


cinemas, theater, bars, restaurants are
open very late in the evening.


2. In short, living in the city is great fun.
However, we have to study and work
hard or we will be left behind.



3. Last, people who live in the city
benefit good education offered by
famous universities and institues.
Besides, living in the city always
keeps people well-informed and
updated so that city- dwellers have
better background than those in the
countyside.


4. Living in the city has three main
advantages.


5. Second, living in the city gives a
person ore opportunities for jobs.
Newly- graduated students can find
good jobs with fairly high


salarybecause many big companies,
international organizations are located
in the city.


<i>( Answer key : 4 </i>–<i> 1 </i>–<i> 5 </i>–<i> 3 </i>–<i> 2 .)</i>
<b>5. Home assignment:</b>


T: ask ss to write a passage about the country life. Prepare the part : “Language
focus”


Ss: listen and note down



<b>D. Remark:</b>


<b>Period 34 unit 5 : the media </b>


<b>Lesson 6: language focus</b>



Date of planning:


<b>A. Objective</b>:


<b>1.</b> <b>Knowledge :</b>By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use “tag-question and
gerunds after some verbs” well


<b>2.</b> <b>Skill : </b>apply the grammar points to do exercises : complete the dialogue ;
supply the correct form of verbs given …


<b>B. Teaching aids</b>: book, chalk, poster,


<b>C. Proceduce</b>:


<b>1.</b> <b>Warm up</b>:


Teacher’s and students’ activities Content of the activities
T: greet ss and call one of them to read


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(122)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=122>

Ss: raise the hand to do.


<b>2.</b> <b>Revision: </b>


Teacher’s and students’ activities Content of the activities
T: help ss to revise the tag questions



Ss: listen carefully.


T: give example for each type
Ss: listen and note down


T: give some special cases of tag questions
Ss: not down.


T: help ss to revise the <i>Gerund</i>


Sss: listen and note down.


1. Tag- question :


* affirmative statement, negative tag?
eg: She is a new comer, isn’t she ?
* negative statement , affirmative tag ?
eg: He doesn’t like sports, does he?
* Note :


+ Let’s …………, shall we ?
+ Keep silent , will you ?
+ I am ………, aren’t I ?
+ I am not …………., are I ?


+ statements used with negative adverbs
such as <i>never , seldom, hardly …</i>or
negative pronouns<i> nothing, nobody, </i>tag
question is in positive form.



eg: Minh seldom goes swimming in the
river, does he ?


2. Gerund : ( “V-ing” follows other verbs )
Like


Enjoy


Have fun + V – ing
Prefer


Dislike
Love
Hate


<b>3.</b> Practice:


Teacher’s and students’ activities Content of the activities
T: allow ss time to do ex1


Ss: think to do


T: call ss to give their answer
Ss: raise the hand to do


T: remark and give corret answer
Ss: listen and note down.


T: explain the next duty they have to do in


Ex2


Ss; listen and do as the request.


T: call some pairs to present and pair work
before the class


Ss: raise the hand to do.


T: go on with the next exercise 3
Ss; do as the guide


T: call ss to ask and answer before the
class


Ss: raise the hand to do


T: guide ss the duty of this exercise. Then
allow them time to write freely.


Ss: work in silence to write


T; call some ss to read their sentences


Ex1: Complete the dialogue :
a) haven’t you


b) didn’t he
c) wasn’t it
d) do you


e) aren’t we.


Ex2: Work with a partner. Look at the
table. Ask and answer questions about
television programs these people like and
dislike. Use tag questions.


eg:


A: Hanh likes music, doesn’t he .
B: Yes , he does.


A: Tuan and Mai don’t like music, do
they ?


B : No, they don’t.


Ex3: Work with a partner. Ask and
answer questions about each item in the
box. ( students do themselves )


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(123)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=123>

aloud before the class.
Ss: raise the hand to do.


<b>4.</b> <b>Production:</b>


T: call ss to say the form of tag-questions again with examples
Ss: listen and raise the hand to do


T: call ss to make more sentences with the verbs leanred above


Ss: think to do


<b>5.</b> <b>Home assignment:</b>


T: ask ss to revise all the knowledge from Unit 1 to Unit 5 for the final test of the
first term.


Ss: listen and note down


<b>D. Remark:</b>


Week 18



Period 35 : Revision for the final test of the semester



Date of planning :


a. Objective :


* By the end of the lesson ss will be able to understand how to use what they
revise for the final test.


B. language content:


* Focusing on : sentences with “ wish” ; tag questions ; passive voice ; some
form of exercises.


* Skill : applying the grammar points to do exercises
c. Teaching aid : book, chalk



d. PROCEDURE :


1. Warm up : greet and introduce what they are going to revise
+ sentences with “ wish” and tag- questions . And passive voice.
2: Revision :


Teacher’s & Students’ activities Content of activities
T: call ss to give the form of the sentences


with “ wish”


Ss: listen and try to remember to say before
the class


T; call others remark and give the examples
Ss: raise the hand to do


T: go on helping ss to revise the form of
Tag- question.


Ss: listen and note down.


T: guide ss to repeat the form of the passive
voice and then give some examples to


1. “ wish” + past subjunctive clause
eg: I am not a good singer.


à I wish I were a good singer


eg : I don’t have a new car.
à I wish I had a new car.
2. Tag- questions:


+ affirmative statement, negative tag?
+ negative statement, affirmative tag?
eg:


He is a new comer, isn’t he ?
They can not swim fast, can they ?
3. passive voice:


* Genaral form :


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(124)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=124>

illustrate.


Ss: listen and note down . + He makes cake every day. à Cake is made ( by him) every day.
+ Nam is cleaning his bike.


à Nam’s bike is being cleaned.
+ She will repaint her room.
à Her room will be repainted.
3. Practice :


Teacher’s & Students’ activities Content of activities
T: extract some exercise from the exercise


book to help ss to apply what they learn to
do.



Ss: apply to do


T: call ss to do on board
Ss: raise the hand ot do


T; remark and give correct answers
Ss’ listen and note down.


T: call ss to say the knowledge that they have
just reviewed


Ss; raise the hand to do


* Part 2 / 49 ( 9th<sub> form English work book </sub>
for consolidation and advance )


* Part 4 / 50 ( 9th<sub> form English work book </sub>
for consolidation and advance )


* Part 6/ 52 ( 9th<sub> form English work book </sub>
for consolidation and advance )


4. Production :


T: ask ss to make more sentences using “ wish” and tag- questions . And passive
voice


Ss; think to do


5. HOME ASSIGNMENT



T: ask ss to make more sentences using the grammar they have just revised.
Review all the knowledge they have learnt to prepare for the final test of the first
semester


Ss: listen and note down.
E. REMARK


Period 36 : The final test of the first semester
Date of planning:


<b>A: Objective</b> : help ss to know how well they have learned English so as for
them to fill their blank of knowledge. Help the teacher to appreciate the capability
of students in learning English.


<b>B: Preparation:</b>


3. Teacher : prepare the knowledge used in the test and type the test papers
4. Student: revise the knowledge for the test


<b>C: procedure: </b>


<b>6.</b> Warm up : greeting and checking the attention of the students


<b>7.</b> Hand out : deliver the test paper to each student


<b>8.</b> Observation :


<b>9.</b> Hand in : ask ss to hand in the test paper when te time finishes



<b>10.</b>Remark and give assigment:


Content of the test



<b>Name : </b>………. Class : …. Mark :
....


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(125)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=125>

I. <b>Circle the best option to complete the following sentences : </b>


9. That boy is better …………. English than I am.


a. in b. at c. for d. with


10.Don’t cook a meal for me , “ he said” I’ve already ………….”


a. eat b. eating c. eaten d. eated


11. “ Let’s go dancing , …………” – “ Yes, let’s”


a. will we . b. do we c. don’t we d. shall we
12.I know that she ………. in the library at this moment.


a. works b. is working c. worked d. has worked


13.She looks very …………. when I told her the news.


a. happily b. happiness c. happy d. was happy


14.I haven’t seen Tom ………. three months



a. since b. for c. until d. before


15.Australia’s one …………. places in the world for a holiday.


a. good b. better c. best d. goodest.


16.Julia’s lonely in Singapore because she doesn’t know ………….


a. somebody b. everybody c. nobody d. anybody.


17.We …….. for long walks in the country when my father was alive.


a. went b. would go c. used to go d. was going.


18.We’ll be late if the bus ……… soon


a. won’t arrive b. doesn’t arrive c. isn’t arriving d. not arrive.


<b>II. Fill in each blank with one suitable word from the box to complete the </b>
<b>following passage.</b>


newspapers radio TV websites program
magazines emails information chats news
There are four people in my family. Each of us has a different hoppy. My dad
likes reading (1) ………….. because he can get latest (2) ……… every
morning. However, my mom enjoys watching (3) ………… and reading (4)


. Mom often spends hours reading articles about fashion and cooking.
………



Unlike my mom and my dad, my brother only loves exploring (5) ……. about
airplanes. He spends most of his free time getting (6) ……….. about the
history and development of aircraft. He also writes (7) ………….. or (8)


with his friends about his hobby. For me, I am really interested in
………


listening to music. I love listen to music on the FM (9) ………… . I also like
music (10) ………….. on TV on Sundays. What about you ? What is your hobby ?


<b>III. Listen and check the sentences given True ( T ) or False ( F ).</b>


1. The volunteer taught the local people how to read and write. 
2. He stayed there for two years. 
3. He wanted to have more hours in the day to work more. 
4. He believed everything would be good after he left. 
5. He could take local people home with him. 


<b>IV. Write a complete letter with the words given . ( 2,5 )</b>
<i>Dear Liz,</i>


<b>6. I</b>

<b>t</b>

<b> / </b>

<b>be</b>

<b> / </b>

<b>long time</b>

<b> / </b>

<b>since</b>

<b> / </b>

<b> I / last</b>

<b>hear / you</b>

<b>.</b>


<b>………</b>


<b>..</b>


<b>……</b>


<b>7.</b> You / like / come / stay / me / cottage / countyside ?



………


..



<b>8.</b> You / your family / welcome / if / want / visit / us .


..
………


<b>9.</b> What about / come / the end / next month ?


..
………


<b>10.</b>Write / let / me / know / if / come.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(126)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=126>

Tapescript:


I came here two years ago because I wanted to teach people about modern health
care. I will be leaving in about two months : I wish I could stay longer but it’s time
for me to go home.


My work here has been very interesting. Iam learning so much . I always wish that
there would be more hours in the day so that I could do more. Maybe it’s silly, but I
worry about what will happen to the villagers after I leave. I wish my students
remembered all the things I’ve tried to teach them. I’ve become so close to the
people here, I wish I could take them home with me ! But of course that’s
impossible. I wish more people joined the Peace Corps. It’s so rewarding and
there’s so much work to be done.



Đề Kiểm Tra Môn Anh Văn Lớp 9

(Bài kiểm tra häc kú 1)



Name: ………. Number: …… Class: ……. Mark:




<b>I. Circle the best option to complete the following sentences: </b>


1. That boy is better …………. English than I am.


a. in b. at c. for d. with


2. Don’t cook a meal for me , “ he said” I’ve already ………….”


a. eat b. eating c. eaten d. eated


3. I know that she ………. in the library at this moment.


a. works b. is working c. worked d. has


worked


4. I haven’t seen Tom ………. three months.


a. since b. for c. until d. before


5. Julia’s lonely in Singapore because she doesn’t know ………….


a. somebody b. everybody c. nobody d. anybody.



6. We’ll be late if the bus ……… soon.


a. won’t arrive b. doesn’t arrive c. isn’t arriving d. not arrive.


<b>II. Supply the correct form of the words given to complete the sentences.</b>


1. Our TV stations get all their ……… from advertising. (COME)
2. Internet is a wonderful ……… of modern life. (INVENT)
3. The Malaysian unit of ……… is the ringgit. (CURRENT)
4. Remote controls are used to ………. With TV.


(INTERACTION)


<b>III. Rewrite the sentences.</b>


1. “Do you speak any other language, Mai” the teacher said.


+ The teacher asked ……….


2. What a pity! I can’t go camping with you.


+ I wish ……….


3. “I’ll be back tomorrow.”


+ He said ………
4. I missed you, so I phoned you quite often.


+ Because ………



<b>IV. Fill in each blank a suitable word to complete the following passage.</b>


It was (1) …….. beautiful day , my friends (2) …… I decided to go on a picnic.
We (3) ……….. a bus to the countryside and we walked about thirty minutes to
the picnic site next (4) ………… the river. We put down the blankets and laid
out the food. (5) …… ….. the meal we played games, went fishing. We all
enjoyed our picnic. We arrived home very late (6)………….. the evening.


<b>V. Find and correct the mistakes.</b>


1. Everyone felt tired, because they sat down to have a rest.


A B C D


2. How much time do you spend surf the web a day?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(127)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=127>

<b>VI. Give correct verbs form.</b>


1. When I (arrive)... home at 8 o’clock yesterday, my mother
(clean) ... the kitchen.


2. There (be) ... no rain here for six months.


3. After (spend) ... a week in the countryside, he decided to
come back home.


<b>WEEK 19</b>



<b>Unit 6: the environment</b>



Period 37: getting stared + listen and read



Date of planning: 10/02


<b>A: objective: </b>


<b>1. Knowledge: </b>By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know the topic of the
Unit and they will know some environmental problems being. .


<b>2. Skill: </b>Listening, Speaking and Reading


B: <b>teaching aids: </b>pictures, tapes, chalks and book


<b>C: procedure:</b>


1. Warm up:


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities


Activity 1: Getting started



T: lead into the lesson with some
questions.


Ss: listen then answer.


T: ask ss to look at six pictures and explain
some word phrases given to describe the
environment



Ss: listen and note down


T; ask ss to match the environmental
problems with the suitable pictures
Ss: listen and do as the request


T: call ss to give out their matching. Then
remark and give correct answers.


Ss: listen and note down.


T: ask ss to give more environmental
problems that they know before the class.
Ss: think to do.


+ What do you think of the environment
nowadays?


+ What do you do to keep the environment
clean?


* Now there are some environmental
problems given. You will match each one
with the picture in the book.


a) air pollution


b) spraying pesticides
c) garbage dump
d) Water pollution.


e) deforestation
f) Dynamite fishing.


2. Presentation:


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities


Activity 2 : Listen and read



T: lead into the passage
Ss: listen


T: play the tape for the first time.
Ss; listen


T: show some new words from the
passage


Ss; listen and note down.


T: ask ss to read the passage in silence and
think to do the first task.


Ss: listen and think to do the task.


* As you know the environment is being
polluted. So “What do you do solve this
problem to keep the environment clean?”
+ cleaning the school yards/ streets/ roads
+ planting trees/ flowers



+ collecting trash
so on ….


* New words :
+ Conservationist
+ shore


+ sand
+ rock
+ as = when


a) Match the names in column A with the
task in column B.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(128)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=128>

T: call ss to give their answers.
Ss: raise the hand to do.


T: call others to remark and then give the
correct answer.


Ss: listen and note down the correct
answers.


T: help ss know how to form and use the
conditional sentence type 1


Ss: listen carefully.


T: ask ss to read the passage again in


silence to answer the questions given.
Ss: read in silence and think to answer the
questions given.


T: call some ss to answer the questions
before the class


Ss: raise the hand to do.


T: call others to remark and give the
correct answers


Ss: listen and note down the correct
answers


<b>* Conditional sentence type 1</b> :
If + simple present, simple future.
Eg:


If we work hard today, we will make this
beach a clean and beautiful place.


b) Answer questions :


1. The speaker is Mr. Brown.


2. The listeners are some volunteer
conservationists


3. They are on the beach.



4. They are going to clean the beach.


5. If we work hard today, we will make this
beach a clean and beautiful place again.
6 + 7 ( students answer themselves )


<b>3. Consolidation:</b>


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: call ss to read the passage aloud


before the class


Ss; raise the hand to do


T; call someone to translate the passage
into Vietnamese.


Ss; raise the hand to do.


<b>4. Homework:</b>


T: ask ss to write something about the environmental pollution. Prepare the next
lesson “Unit 6: speak”


Ss: listen and note down


<b>D. remark:</b>



<b>Unit 6: the environment</b>


Period 38 – speak



Date of planning:
A. <b>objective: </b>


<b>Knowledge: </b>By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to persuade others to agree
with them about the environmental pollution and persuade others to something.


<b>Skill : </b>Listening and Speaking


B. <b>teaching aids: </b>pictures, chalks and book


<b>c. procedure:</b>


1. Warm up:


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: greet and call some ss to retell some


environmental problems.
Ss: raise the hand to do.


T: call one student to say what they
should do to protect the environment


* Who can say some environmental
problems before class?



* What should you do to keep the
environment clean?


2. Pre- speaking:


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: divide class into small groups and ask


them to discuss about what they should
do to protect the environment


* Work in group to discuss :


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(129)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=129>

Ss: listen and work in group to discuss
T: call some ss to present their ideas
before the class


Ss: raise the hand to do.


T: lead ss to the table and then give some
new words from it.


Ss: listen and note down.


T: ask ss to revise the phrases used to
persuade someone with examples given
Ss: listen carefully.


* Now look at the activities given in the
table as suggestion to persuade.



+ wrap


+ banana leaves
+ dissolve
+ reduce


+ exhaust fume


* Phrases used to persuade others
( in the book on page 49 )


3. Speaking


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: ask ss to work in pair to practice


speaking


Ss: work in pair to practice persuading
others to do something.


T: call some pairs to present before the
class


Ss: raise the hand to do.


T: explain the next task. And ask ss to write
the possible answers to the questions given.
Ss: listen and do as the request



T: after ss finish, ask them to work in pair
to ask and answer in order to persuade the
other to do something


Ss: work in pair to do


T: call some pairs to present before the
class


Ss: raise the hand to do.


T; remark and correct the mistakes if they
have made


Ss; listen carefully.


a) Practice persuading others :


b) Find the possible answers to the
questionnaires.


<i>Suggestion answers:</i>


+ Write on both sides of the paper; recycle
used paper.


+ save plastic bags ; clean and reuse them
+ don’t throw waste and garbage into
streams, lakes and even oceans.



+ discard / throw garbage in waste bins
+ use fewer private vehicles and don’t
release pollutants into the air.


+ try to reuse and recycle things.


<b>6. Post </b>–<b> speaking:</b>


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: request ss to work in group again to


make the list of things they should do to
keep the environment clean and beautiful.
Ss; listen to the guide and work in group to
make the list.


T; call the representative of each group to
present the class.


Ss: raise the hand to do.


* Work in group to make the list of things
you should do to keep the environment
clean and beautiful.


<b>7. Homework:</b>


T: ask ss to write a passage about the environmental pollution and how to solve it.
Prepare the next lesson “Unit 6: Listen.”



Ss: listen and note down


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(130)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=130>

Week 20



<b>Unit 6: the environment</b>


Period 39 – listen



Date of planning:


<b>A. objective: </b>


<b>1. Knowledge: </b>By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to develop their
listening to a passage about the pollution of oceans in order to fill in the
information table. Understand the main ideas of the lesson.


<b>2. Skill : </b>Listening comprehension
B. <b>teaching aids:</b>


Pictures, tapes, chalks and book


<b>c. procedure:</b>


1. Warm up:


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: greet and call ss to say their ideas about


the environmental pollution nowadays.


Ss; raise the hand to do before the class.
T: ask ss a question to lead into the lesson
Ss: listen and answer the question


+ What do you think of the ocean now?


2. Pre- listening:


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: introduce the topic of the lesson.


Ss: listen carefully.


T: ask ss to look at the table and guess the
causes of oceanic pollution


Ss: listen and do as the request.


T: give some new words from the passage
Ss: listen and note down new words.


* Now you will listen to a passage about the
causes of the oceanic pollution. Listen and
find out those causes.


* New words :
+ raw sewage
+ be guilty of :
+ ship



+ oil spill
+ leak
+ vessel
+ marine
+ deliberate


3. Listening


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: call ss to give their guessing. Then play


the tape twice.


Ss: listen and fill in the gaps in the table
T: call ss to give out their filling. Call
others to remark.


Ss: raise the hand to do


T; play the tape again to remark and give
correct answer


Ss: listen and note down


Secondly : garbage is …


Thirdly : … come from ships at sea.


Next : Waste materials come from factories
Finally: Oil is washed from the land.



<b>4. Post </b>–<b> listening:</b>


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: ask ss to work in group to discuss what


they should do to save the oceans and
marine life.


Ss: work in group to discuss


* What shold we do to save oceans and
marine life .?


+ Don’t catch fish with dynamite


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(131)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=131>

T; call some representative of each group
to present before the class


Ss: raise the hand to do


T; remark and then correct th mistakes


+ Conserve precious species.


+ Don’t allow factories dump chemical
waste into oceans


.



<b>5. Homework:</b>


T: ask ss to use the cues in the information table to write into a passage about the
oceanic pollution. Prepare the next lesson: “Unit 6: Read”


Ss: listen and note down


<b>D. remark:</b>


<b>Unit 6: the environment</b>


Period 40 – read



Date of planning:


<b>A. objective: </b>


<b>1. Knowledge: </b>By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand a poem
about the environmental pollution.


<b>2. Skill : </b>Reading comprehension


B. <b>teaching aids: </b> subordinate, tapes, chalks and book


<b>c. procedure:</b>


1. Warm up :


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities


T: greet and call ss to read their


composition about the oceanic pollution
written at home


Ss: listen and raise the hand to do.


* Now who can read your composition
written at home aloud before the class?


2. Pre- reading:


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: teach new words from the poem


Ss: listen and note down.


T: use suitable techniques to show
meaning of new words.


Ss; listen and guess new words.
T: introduce the scene


Ss: listen


T: give some sentences in order for ss to
guess which is true and which is false.
Ss: listen and read the poem to guess the
sentences given.



T: call ss to give out their guessing and
write them on board.


Ss; raise the hand to do.


* New words :


+ junk-yard (n): bÃi chứa hàng phế thải
+ stream (n):


+


+ foam (n) :
+ minimize (v) :
+ mass (n) :
+ bubbles (n) :
+ flow (v) :
+ hedge (n) :
* Set the scene :


A mother and her son are having a picnic in
park. The son sees the place is polluted. He
asks his mother about the problems of
pollution. Now you read the poem and
guess the following sentences True or
False.


1. The boy is really interested in the
problems of pollution



2. He doesn’t make the place more
polluted.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(132)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=132>

4. His mother thinks she should protect the
environment even when she is on


holiday.


3. Reading


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: read the poem and then let ss read


silently to find the answer


Ss; read in silence to find true sentences
and false one


T; call ss to give their answer
Ss: raise the hand to do .


T; remark and give correct answers
T: guide the next task they have to do.
Ss; read the words and match, basing on
the sentences in the poem.


T: call ss to give their answer.
Ss: raise the hand to do


T: call others to remark and then give


correct answer


Ss: listen and note down.


T: ask ss to work in pair to ask and
answer the questions given.


Ss: work in pair to ask and answer the
questions.


T: call some ss to read the poem aloud
before the class


Ss: raise the hand to do.


T: go on calling some pairs to present
their answers before the class.


Ss: raise the hand to do.


T; remark and give correct answers
Ss: listen and note down.


T: call one student to read the poem
again.


* Prediction check :


1. T 2. T 3. F 4. F



a) Match each word with its explanation.
1 – c 2 – g 3 – f 4 – e
5 – d 6 – a 7 – b


b) Comprehension questions :


1. The world will end up like a second-hand
junk-yard, with all of its treasures quite
gone.


2. She thinks other folk pollute the
environment but not her and her son.
3. His mother will take him home right


away.


4. Ss’ answers.


5. The poem wants us to learn that everyone
is responsible for keeping the


environment from pollution.
6. Ss’ answers.


<b>4. Post </b>–<b> reading:</b>


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: devide class into small group of four and


ask them to discuss about the topic given.


Ss: listen and work in group to discuss.
T: call the representative of some groups to
present before the class.


Ss: raise the hand to do.


* Discussion :


What we could do in our school to
minimize the pollution.


<b>5. Homework:</b>


T: ask ss to write 50 word compositions about environment protection. Prepare the
next lesson “Unit 6: Write”.


Ss: listen and note down


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(133)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=133>

Week 21



<b>Unit 6: the environment</b>


Period 41: write



Date of planning: 26/01


<b>A. objective : </b>


<b>Knowledge: </b>By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know how to write a
complaint letter.



<b>Skill : </b>Writing


B. <b>teaching aids: </b> chalks, pictures, extra boards and book


<b>c. procedure:</b>


1. Warm up:


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: greet and call ss to read their


composition before the class.
Ss: raise the hand to do.


* What you should do in your school to
minimize the pollution.


2. Pre- writing:


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: lead into the topic with some questions


and give the extra board with sections of a
complaint letter in order for ss to arrange
them in correct order.


Ss: listen and do as the request.


T: ask ss to open their books and check.


T: ask ss to read the letter given in the
book well in order to label and put the
sections given in correct order.


Ss: read the letter to label and put the
sections in correct order.


T: call ss to give their answer key.
Ss: raise the hand to do.


T: ask ss to reread the letter and answer
the following questions.


Ss: reread and think to answer questions.
T: call some ss to answer before the class.
Ss: raise the hand to answer.


T: request ss to read situation in Part b.
Then answer some questions given.
Ss: read and think to answer


T: give correct answers


+ Have you ever written any complaint
letters?


+ In what situation?


+ What did you write in a complaint letter?
+ How many sections do you know there are


in a complaint letter?


* Now take out and open your books to
check.


a) Ordering the sections in the letter :
* Answer :


+ What does Mr Nhat complain about?
+ What problems does he mention?
+ What does he suggest?


b) Read the situation :


1. What do you complain about?


2. What problems do you want to mention?


<b>4.</b> What do you want to suggest?
Answer :


1. The way people catch fish.


2. Fish and other animals have died
3. Prohibiting and fining heavily anyone


catching fish in this way.


3. Writing



Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: allow ss time to write a complaint


letter.


Ss: write a letter basing on the situation
given.


T: go around to help ss.


* write a complaint letter.


<b>4. Post </b>–<b> writing:</b>


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: request ss to exchange their letters to


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(134)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=134>

Ss; exchange to check the letters.


T: correct some typical mistakes that Ss
can not correct them.


Ss: listen carefully.


<b>5. Homework:</b>


T: ask ss to think a difficult situation they have faced to write a similar complaint
letter to the person who caused that trouble. Prepare the Part “Language focus”
Ss: listen and note down.



<b>D. remark:</b>


<b>Unit 6: the environment</b>


Period 42 – language focus



Date of planning: 26/01


<b>A. objective : </b>


<b>Knowledge: </b>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know how to know
some grammar points in this unit such as :


<b>+ Adjectives and adverbs</b>
<b>+ Adverb clauses of reason</b>
<b>+ Adjective + that clause</b>


<b>+ Conditional sentence type 1.</b>


<b>Skill : </b>Use grammatical points in communication and doing exercises
B. <b>teaching aids: </b> chalks and book.


<b>c. procedure:</b>


1. Warm up :


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: call ss to read their complaint letter


aloud before the class


Ss: raise the hand to do


T: ask ss to remind what grammar points
they have learnt in this lesson.


Ss: listen and recall to say.


* Who raise the hand to read your letter
written at home?


* What grammar points have you learnt in
this unit?


2. Revision and 3. Practice:


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities


Activity 1 : Adjectives and adverbs



T: encourage ss to recall how to use
adjectives and adverbs


Ss: recall to say their use


T: ask ss to work in pair to change adj
given into adv


Ss: listen and work in pair to do
T: ask ss to fill in the gap in each
sentence



Ss: try to fill in


T; request ss to exchange to check. Then
remark to give correct answer.


Ss: do as the request. Then note down
correct answer


* Adj + ly à Adv
careful carefully
beautiful beautifully
clever cleverly
noisy noisily
good well
hard hard
fast fast
Ex1/ page 53:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(135)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=135>

Activity 2 : Adverb clauses of reason.



T: help ss to understand more about
adverbs of reason such as : because ; as ;
since.


Ss: listen and note down.


T: ask ss to read the sentence a and then
let them time to do the rest ones



Ss: use the cues given to make


meaningful sentences using <i>as / because</i>
<i>/ since</i>.


T: call ss to give out their complete
sentences.


Ss: raise the hand to do.


T: remark and give correct answers.
Ss: listen and note down


* <i>Because</i>, <i>since</i> and <i>as</i> have the same
meaning.


Ex2 / page 54


a) Ba is tired because / as / since ……
b) I have a broken leg because / as / since I


fell over while I was playing basketball
c) I’m going to be late for school because/ as/


since the bus is late


d) I broke the cup because / as / since I was
careless


e) I want to go home because / as / since I feel


sick.


f) I’m hungry because / as /since I’ve eaten
all day.


<b>Activity 3 : Adjective + that clause</b>


T: lead into this exercise with a question
Ss: listen and answer


T: introduce the structure of this
sentence


Ss: listen attentively.


T: ask ss to read the example sentence
and tell them to work in pair to do
sentences from a to e


Ss: apply to do the sentences from a – e
T: call ss to present before the class
Ss: raise the hand to do.


+ How does Mr Brown feel when people have
spoilt the area?


He said: “I<i> am disappointed that people have </i>
<i>spoilt the area?</i>


à S + be + adj + that – clause.



( glad ; delighted ; happy ; pleased ; excited ;
sorry ; amazed … )


Ex3 / page 55.


a) That’s wonderful ….


b) I’m excited that I can go to Dalat this time.
c) I’m sorry that I broke your bike yesterday
d) I’m disappointed that you didn’t phone me


about that.


e) I’m amazed that I could win the first prize.


<b>Activity 4 : Conditional sentence type 1 .</b>


T: explain how to form and use the
conditional sentence type 1 :


Ss: listen carefully.


T: ask ss to work in pair to match each
half in A with suitable one in B


Ss: work in pair to do


T; call some ss to give their matching
result



Ss: raise the hand to do.


T: explain the task they have to do
Ss: listen and do


T; ask ss to exchange their answers
Ss: exchange


T; call some ss to read full sentences
Ss: raise the hand to do.


T: remarks and give correct answer.


* Conditional type 1 :


If clause ( present tense), main clause ( future
tense )


à It’s used to express a condition that may
come true or happen at present or in the
future./


eg:


If you don’t work hard, you will fail your
exams..


Ex 4 / page 56.



1 – e ; 2 – a ; 3 – c ; 4 – d ; 5 – b
Ex5: complete the sentences.


a) if the rice paddies are polluted, …


b) If we go on littering, the environment will
become seriously polluted.


c) If we plant more trees along the streets, we
will have more shades and fresh air.


d) If we use much pesticide on vegetables, the
vegetables will become poisonous and
inedible


e) If we keep our environment clean, we will
live a happier and healthier life


<b>4. Homework:</b>


T: ask ss to redo all exercises in the section Language focus. Prepare unit 7
Ss: listen and note down


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(136)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=136>

<b>WEEK 22</b>



<b>Period 43 </b>


<b>Date of planning: 01/02</b>


<b>Unit 7: saving energy</b>




<b>Lesson 1: Getting stared & Listen and read</b>


<b>A. objective : </b>


<b>1. Knowledge: </b>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to


<b>-</b> Use the words and phrases relating to energy-saving.


<b>-</b> Understand the dialogue and the way to save energy.


<b>2. Skill : </b>Listening, Speaking and Reading


B. <b>teaching aids: </b>pictures, posters, tapes, chalks and book


<b>c. procedure:</b>


1. Warm up:


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities


Activity 1: Getting started



T: ask ss to look at the picture and work in
pair to make a list of things the family
could do t save energy.


Ss: work in pair to make a list.


T: call on some ss to read the list aloud.


Ss: raise the hand to do (can use some
modal verbs such as: must and should.
T: give some suggested sentences
Ss: listen and note down.


 Suggested sentences :


+ Save water by turning off the faucet when
there are enough water supplies.


+ Turn off the lights when unnecessary
+ Turn off TV and radio when nobody
watches or listens.


2. Presentation:


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities


Activity 2 : Listen and read



T: Pre teach some new words from the
dialogue


Ss: listen and note down.


T: use suitable techniques to show meaning
of the new words.


Ss: listen and copy down the meaning.
T: check how Ss understand the new words


given by giving groups pieces of paper
consisting 2 columns : A ( new words ) and
B ( Vietnamese meaning )


Ss: work in group to math new words with
correct Vietnamese meaning.


T: feedback and give correct Answer.
Ss: listen and note down.


<i> Answers:</i>


<i> 1.b 2. d 3. f 4. E 5. a 6. c </i>


1. New words :


+ water bill (n) : <i>charges of water used.</i>


+ enormous (adj) : <i>big, huge</i>


+ crack (v / n ) : <i>fissure, break without </i>
<i>complete separation of parts. </i>


+ pipe ( n) : <i>tube of metal for conveying </i>
<i>water.</i>


+ dripping faucet (n) : <i>the tap with falling </i>
<i>drop of water.</i>


<b>New words meaning</b>



1. Water bill a. thợ sửa ống nớc
2. Enormous b. Hố đơn tiền nớc
3. Crack c. Vịi nớc bị nhỏ giọt
4. Pipe d. To, lớn


5. Plumber e. èng níc
6. Dripping


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(137)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=137>

T: set the scene
Ss: listen


T: play the tape for the first time
Ss: listen to the tape


T: ask ss to practice the dialogue with a
partner.


Ss: practice the dialogue in pair


T: call some pairs to practice the dialogue
aloud.


Ss: raise the hand to do.


T: feedback on Ss’ pronunciation and in
tonal Plumber ion and correct mistakes if
any.


T: ask ss to read the dialogue again and


decide the statements given in the book
True or False. Correct the false ones


Ss: listen and read the dialogue to choose
T: call some Ss to read their answers in
class. Ask them to explain their choice
Ss: listen and raise the hand to do
T: feedback and give correct answers.
Ss: listen and note down.


<b>2. Practice:</b>


Mrs. Mi is talking to her neighbor, Mrs.


Ha about the water bill this month.



 Correct answers:
1. T


2. T


3. F. ( Mrs. Ha hasn’t checked the pipes)
4. F. ( Mrs. Ha suggests taking showers)
5. T


<b>3. Consolidation:</b>


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: write some words in the dialogue on the


board. Then ask them to close the book and


recall the dialogue base on the words given.
Ss: listen and try to do


T: call some pairs to present before the
class.


Ss: raise te hand to do.


<b>Mapped dialogue :</b>


<b>Matter</b>



<b>Worried ... water bill</b>



<i>Reduce ...</i>


<i>Plumber ... cracks.</i>
<i>...</i>


<b>4. Homework:</b>


T: Summarize the main points. Ask ss to learn the dialogue by heart and then
prepare the next lesson “Unit 7: Speak.”


Ss: listen and note down


<b>D. remark:</b>


<b>Period 4 </b>



<b>Date of planning: 01/02</b>


<b>Unit 7: saving energy</b>



<b>Lesson 2: Speak</b>


<b>A. objective: </b>


<b>1. Knowledge: </b>By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand and use
suggestions and know how to response to suggestions in order to save energy
through group discussion.


<b>2. Skill: </b>Listening and Speaking


B. <b>teaching aids: </b>pictures, chalks and book


<b>c. procedure:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(138)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=138>

Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: Divide class into two groups to play a


game called “ Whispering Game”
Ss; listen to the teacher’s explanation
how to play game


T: whisper the message to the first
person of each group


Ss: start to play the game



 <b>Whispering Game </b>:


Message :



<i>Everybody must save energy by turning off </i>
<i>the light when unnecessary</i>


2. Pre- speaking:


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: Review the way to make suggestions


Ss: The whole classes listen attentively.
T: ask ss to make example for each
structure given.


Ss: raise the hand and apply to do.


T: call some ss to present their sentences
before th class


 <b>Suggestions :</b>


<b>I suggest + V-ing</b>



<i>I think we should </i>
<i>Shall we .. ?</i>
<i>Why don t we ... ?</i>’


<i>How / What about + V-ing. ?</i>


<i>Let s ...</i>’


 <b>Responses :</b>


<i>Ok / That s a good idea. / All right / No. I </i>’


<i>don t want to . / I prefer to ... / Let s ...</i>’ ’


3. Speaking


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: have ss look at the expressions in teh


above tables and pictures in the book to
make suggestions about how to save
energy. Follow the example.


Ss: work individually


T: Call some ss to read the suggestions
aloud


Ss: raise the hand to do.


T: feedback and give some suggested
Answers


Ss: listen and note down.


 Make suggestions :


Eg :


I think we should turn off the faucet.
I suggest fixing the faucet.


 Answer key as suggested:


b) I think we should turn off the gas fire.
c) I suggest turning off the fan.


d) I think we should turn off the air
conditioner when no one is in.


e) Why don’t we turn off the V when no on
watches it.


f) Let’s go to school by us or bicycle.


<b>3. Post </b>–<b> speaking:</b>


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: ask ss to work in group of four. Work out


an ACTION PLAN to save energy for your
class.


Ss: listen and work in group to do.
T: go around the class to help ss if
necessary



Then call some groups ast out the
discussion.


Ss: raise the hand to do.


T: feedback and give suggested answer
Ss: listen and note down.


 Work in group to discuss what you
should do to save energy in your class.
 Suggested answer:


A: I think we should turn off the light


before leaving the class.



B: That’s a god idea.



C: What about going to school by bus?


D: Great! Let’s go to school by bus



<b>4. Homework:</b>


T: ask ss to make some other suggestions at home about how to study English
better / how to help the poor/ how to be a good student... .


Prepare the next lesson Unit 7: Listen.
Ss: listen and note down


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(139)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=139>

<b>WEEK 22</b>




<b>Period 45 </b>


<b>Date of planning: 07/02</b>


<b>Unit 7: saving energy</b>



<b>Lesson 3: Listen</b>


<b>A. objective: </b>


<b>1. Knowledge: </b>By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to develop their


listening for gist and specific information. They will understand and know how
to do two common listening tasks: True or False and Gap filling.


<b>-</b> They will get general knowledge about one kind of alternative energy: solar
energy.


<b>2. Skill: </b>Listening comprehension


B. <b>teaching aids: </b>pictures, tapes, chalks and book


<b>c. procedure:</b>


1. Warm up :


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: ask ss some questions to lead into the


lesson



Ss: listen and try to answer the questions
given.


+ What is solar energy?


+ What are advantages of solar energy?
+ Is solar energy operated in Viet Nam?


2. Pre- listening:


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: show ss some new words from the


typescript


Ss: listen and note down.


T: use suitable techniques to show the
meaning.


Ss: listen carefully.


T: check ss how they understand new
words by rub out the meaning of new
words in Vietnamese and then ask them to
rewrite the meaning again.


Ss: participate.



 New words :


+ Solar (adj ) : belong to sun
+ Solar energy (n) :


+ Nuclear power ( n) :
+ Solar panel (n) :
+ Advanced (adj) :
+ Roof (n) :


3. Listening


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T : Let ss read the statements given in the


book and make sure Ss understand all the
statements


Ss: read the statements individually.
T: Instruct the task they have to do.
Ss: listen carefully.


T: play the tape twice and then ask ss to
compare their answers with friends
Ss: listen and do as the request.


T: feed back and give correct answers
Ss: listen and note down.


a) <b>True or False</b> :



Listen to the news on solar energy and decide
whether the statements are true or false.
Check (V) the boxes and correct the false
ones.


* <b>Answer key :</b>


1. True


2. False. ( Most of our electricity comes
from the use of coal, gas, oil or nuclear
power ).


3. False. ( It is enough to provide power for
total population )


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(140)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=140>

T: guide the second task and ask ss to
guess the missing words.


Ss: listen to the guide and then try to
guess the missing words.


T: play the tape again and ask ss to do the
second task.


Ss: listen and try to fill in each gap with
one word they hear.


T: call on some Ss to read the completed


sentences aloud.


Ss: raise the hand to do


T: feedback and give correct answers
Ss: listen and note down.


5. False ( in 2015 ).


<b>b) Gap filling : Fill in the gap with one </b>
<b>new word you hear.</b>


1. effective
2. pollution
3. countries
4. store
5. roof
6. instead.


<b>4. Post </b>–<b> listening:</b>


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: help ss revise the content of the


listening by holding a game called “ True
or False repetition drill”


Ss: take part in the game.


* Use the statements in the first task to check


Ss’ understanding.


<b>5. Homework:</b>


T: summarize the main points and give ss homework: Write about the advantage of
solar energy. Prepare the next lesson Unit 7: Read.


Ss: listen and note down


<b>D. remark:</b>


Period 46



Date of planning: 07/02


<b>Unit 7: saving energy</b>


<b>Lesson 4: Read</b>


<b>A. objective: </b>


<b>1. Knowledge: </b>By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to get general idea of
the reading through choosing the best summary and answering questions.


<b>2. Skill: </b>Reading comprehension for gist and details about ways to save energy.
B. <b>teaching aids: </b> subordinate, tapes, chalks and book


<b>c. procedure:</b>


1. Warm up :



Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: greet and ask ss some Yes/ No questions


to lead into the lesson.


Ss: listen and try to answer the questions.


+ Do you usually turn off the light when it is
not necessary?


+ Do you usually go to school by bus?
+ Do you often put garbage into dustbin?
+ Do you usually use banana trees to wrap
things?


+ Do you usually turn off the tap when it is
not necessary?


+ Does your father often drive to work?


2. Pre- reading:


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(141)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=141>

Ss: listen and note down.


T: check Ss’ understanding by asking ss to
make sentences using the new words
given.



Ss: listen and try to make them.


T: call on some Ss to read their sentences
aloud. Then give comment to make sure Ss
understand the use of the words.


Ss: raise the hand to read and listen to the
correction from the teacher.


+ luxury > < Necessity :


+ consumer (n) : <i>user of products or services</i>


+ household (n) : <i>family </i>


+ account for (v) : <i>represent</i>


+ labeling scheme (n) : <i>campaign that gives </i>
<i>labels to products.</i>


+ Tumble dryer (n) : <i>machine hat dries </i>
<i>things usually hair or clothes.</i>


+ Innovation (n) : <i>bringing in new ideas, </i>
<i>making changes.</i>


3. Reading


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities


T: ask ss to read the passage quickly and


answer the following questions


Ss: read and try to answer the questions
asked by teacher.


T: call on ss to answer the questions.
Then give correct answers


T: ask ss to read the passage more
carefully and choose the best summary
for it among four options given in the
book


Ss: read and think to choose.


T: call on ss to give their choice with their
explanation for it.


Ss: raise the hand to do.


T: feedback and give correct answer
Ss: listen and note down.


T: tell ss to read the passage again and
answer the questions.


Ss: read and think to answer.



T: ask ss to compare their answers with a
friend


Ss: do as the request.


T: call some Ss to read their answers
aloud before class


Ss: raise the hand to do.


T: make necessary corrections and give
correct answers


Ss: listen and note down the correct
answers.


1. Which continents are mentioned in the text?
2. Are electricity, gas and water luxuries or
necessities


Answer :


1. America and Europe.
2. They are necessities.


a) Choose the best option of summary for the
text.


Answer key :



3. <i>North American and European countries </i>
<i>are interested in saving money and natural </i>
<i>resources.</i>


à Because three others are too specific. They
only cover one part of the passage.


b) Answer questions :


1. Western consumers are interested in


products that will not only work effectively
but also save money.


2. We can use energy-saving bulbs instead of
ordinary 100 watt-light bulbs to spend less
on lighting


3. She will pay US$ for lighting if she uses
energy-saving bulbs instead.


4. The purpose of the labeling scheme is to
help consumers to know how efficient each
model is, compared with other appliances
in the same category so that they can save
money and energy.


<b>4. Post </b>–<b> reading:</b>


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities


T: expand the topic by opening a discussion


on question.


Ss: discuss in group


T: call on representative of each group to
present before the class.


Ss: raise the hand to do
T: give suggested answers


* Discuss each other on the following
question :


<i>Why should we save energy?</i>


Suggested answer :


<b>-</b> <i>Conserve the Earth s resources.</i>’


<b>-</b> <i>Protect the environment.</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(142)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=142>

T: remind the topic again and then assign ss homework: Learn new words by heart
and translate the passage into Vietnamese. Prepare “Unit 7: Write”.


Ss: listen and note down


<b>D. remark:</b>



week 24



<b>Unit 7 : saving energy</b>


Period 47 – write



Date of planning: 22/02


<b>A. objective: </b>


<b>1. Knowledge: </b>By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know how to write a
short, simple speech with clear organization about energy saving and other school-
related topics and present before the class


<b>2. Skill: </b>Writing


B. <b>teaching aids: </b> chalks, pictures, extra boards and book


<b>c. procedure:</b>


1. Warm up :


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: greet ss and ask them to do the


following exercise


Ss: listen to explanation and think to do the
exercise



T: call one Student to do and other listen
and remark.


Ss: raise the hand to do.


T: feedback and give correct answers


* Match the word in A to the word in B to
make completed words.


A B
1. Electricity a. Saving
2. Energy b. Machine
3. Washing c. Dryer
4. Tumble d. Countries
5. Western e. Bill


à 1.e 2.a 3.b 4.c 5.d


2. Pre- writing:


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: explain the definition of a speech


Ss: listen carefully


T: implicate the function of the parts of a
speech by questioning


Ss: listen and answer.


T: ask ss to match


Ss: think to match and then compare with a
friend


T: call on some Ss to give out their answer
Ss: raise the hand to do .


<i>A speech is the act of delivering a formal </i>
<i>spoken communication to an audience. A </i>
<i>speech usually has three parts : </i>


<i><b>Introduction, Body, </b>and<b> Conclusion.</b></i>


<b>* </b>Match :


<b>What do we usually do in </b>


<b>Instruction?</b>



<i>What is included in Body?</i>
<i>Key: </i> 1.B 2.C 3.a


3. Writing


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: ask ss to work in pair, put the sections in


the correct place to complete the speech.
Ss: work in pair



T: call on some Ss to deliver the speech
before the class


Ss: raise the hand to do .


T: comment and correct any necessary
mistakes. Then give suggested answer.
T: tell ss to choose one topic in the book to


* <b>Ordering.</b>


<i>Answer key : 3 - 2 </i>–<i> 1.</i>


<b>* Preparing and delivering a speech.</b>
<i>Choose one of the topics in the book: </i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(143)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=143>

write a speech.
Ss: choose and write


T: ask ss to compare the writing with a
friend in order to comment and check their
writing.


Ss: listen and do as the request.


<i>speech for the class. </i>


<b>4. Post </b>–<b> writing:</b>


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities


T: call on some Ss to deliver their speech


before the class


Ss: raise the hand to do.


T: give comments and Ss’ performance
regarding pronunciation, body language
eye contact


Ss: listen carefully.


* Suggested answer:
<i><b>Reducing garbage: </b></i>


<i>Good morning ladies and gentlemen. Thank </i>
<i>you for coming here today. I m Professor </i>’


<i>Hung. President of Friends of the Earth. I m </i>’


<i>going to tell you about the ways of reducing </i>
<i>garbage.</i>


<i> AS we know that reducing garbage is </i>
<i>necessary. We can reduce garbage by :</i>


 <i>Collecting plastic bags</i>


 <i>Not keeping solid waste with food waste.</i>



 <i>Putting different kinds of waste in </i>
<i>different places.</i>


<i>I hope that you will be able to find the most </i>
<i>suitable way to reduce the amount of </i>


<i>garbage we produce.</i>


<i><b>Reusing paper :</b></i>


Good evening everybody. I’m glad to b


e here this evening. My name is Nam. I


come from grade 9A. I’m going to tell


you about reusing paper.



<i>There are three ways to reuse paper. Firstly, </i>
<i>we should have separate wastebasket for </i>
<i>waste paper. Secondly, we should keep sheets</i>
<i>with single printed paper for drafting.</i>


<i>If you follow these simple rules, not only </i>
<i>will you save money, but also the </i>


<i>environment will be cleaner.</i>


<i><b>Saving energy in the kitchen :</b></i>


Hi every body. It’s pleasure to be here


with you today. My name is Long. Our


topic today is ways of saving energy in



the kitchen.



<i>Saving energy is our responsibility. We can </i>
<i>save energy in the kitchen by :</i>


 <i>Turning off the lights</i>


 <i>Preparing food carefully before turning </i>
<i>on stove.</i>


 <i>Keeping refrigerator door close.</i>


<i>If you follow these simple rules, not only will</i>
<i>you save money, but also the natural </i>


<i>resources will be preserved.</i>
<i>( Could use Ss speech )</i>’


<b>5. Homework:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(144)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=144>

Ss: listen and note down.


<b>D. remark :</b>


<b>Unit 7 : saving energy</b>


Period 48 – language focus



Date of planning: 23/02



<b>A. objective: </b>


<b>1. Knowledge: </b>By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know how to know some
grammar points in this unit such as :


+ Common connectives, phrasal verbs, and suggestion


<b>2. Skill : </b>Use grammatical points in communication and doing exercises
B. <b>teaching aids: </b> chalks and book.


<b>c. procedure:</b>


1. Warm up :


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: ask ss to work in group and review all


the ways to save energy which they have
learned in his unit.


Ss: work on group.


T: gather the ideas from Ss and have some
final thought on ways to save energy
Ss: listen and note down.


* Work in group to give some ways to save
energy .


2. Revision and 3. Practice:



Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities


Activity 1 : Connectives



T: explain function of connectives
Ss: listen carefully


T: ask ss to make examples o demonstrate
he use of connectives.


Ss: apply to do.


T: request ss to do Ex1
Ss: think to do


T; call on some Ss to give their answers
before the class


Ss: raise the hand to do


T: feedback and give correct answers


+ And


+ But, however.
+ Because
+ So, therefore.
+ Or



Ex1:


a) and b) but


c) because d) Therefore
e) or f) so


g) and h) However.


Acticity 2 : Phrasal verbs.



T: implicit the meaning of phrasal verbs
through example


Ss: listen carefully. And guess the
meaning of the phrasals.


T: ask Ss to do exercise 2.
Ss: think to do


T; call on some Ss to do
Ss: raise the hand to do


T: feedback to give correct answers.
Ss: listen and note down.


+<i> It s dark here. Can you </i>’ <i>turn on the light ?</i>
<i>+ Please turn off TV when you finish </i>


<i>watching.</i>



<i>+ It s important to </i>’ <i>look for a job after </i>
<i>graduation.</i>


<i>+ My sister looks after the pet when I am </i>
<i>away.</i>


<i>+ He goes on talking about himself.</i>


Ex2: Complete the sentences. Use the right
tense form of phrasal verbs in the box and the
pictures.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(145)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=145>

b. go on
c. turn on
d. looked for.
e. turn off.


<b>Activity 3 : Making suggestions.</b>


T: help ss to review some structures to
make suggestions


Ss: listen and note down.


T: divide class into two teams. Team 1
make suggestions to help the poor in the
neighborhood of their school. Team 2
make suggestions to improve their
English.



Ss: work in group to make suggestions,
using the ideas in the textbooks.


T: call on some Ss to read aloud their
suggestions.


* Way to make suggestions:


<b>+ Suggest + V- ing</b>



<i>+ Suggest that S + should + V.</i>
<i>+ Let s ’ …</i>


<i>+ Shall we … ?</i>
<i>+ Why don t we ’</i> <i>…?</i>


<i>+ What / How about ………?</i>


<i>* </i>Work in group to make suggestions :


<b>4. Homework:</b>


T: focus on the main grammar points in the lesson. Ask ss to complete all the
exercises in the workbook. Prepare for the 45min test.


Ss: listen and note down


<b>D. remark :</b>



Period 49



Date of planning: 28/02


Test



<i><b>Khoanh tròn đáp án đúng</b></i>



1. I don’t know how to swim. I wish I ………… how to swim .


a. know b. known c. knowed d. knew


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(146)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=146>

a. The examiner asked Lan that where she lived? b. The examiner asked
Lan where she lived.


c. The examiner asked me where I lived d. The examiner asks Lan
where she lived.


3. When we reach ………… Ha Noi, we will phone you.


a. to b. in c. into d. 


4. My father often goes to work ……… breakfast.


a. after b. before c. for d. during


5. We’ll play tennis and ……….. we’ll have lunch.


a. so b. so that c. then d.



after.


6. Reduce, reuse and recycle are the best way to ………….. the environment.


a. protect b. protected c. protective d.


protection


7. We are talking about the ……… of natural resources.


a. preserving b. preserve c. preservation d.


preserver


8. You have to run ……… if you don’t want to be ………..


a. fastly/ lately b. fastly/ late c. fast/ lately d.
fast/ late


9. He didn’t know how to solve the problem ……… he asked her for
help.


a. since b. because c. so d. for


10. Can you ………….. the light? It’s too dark to do homework.


a. turn on b. turn off c. turn in d. turn at


11. She suggested ……… money for the poor people in the region.



a. to save b. saving c. to saving d. save


<i><b> Khoanh trßn từ có phần phát âm khác với những từ còn l¹i</b></i>



12. A. campus B. relax C. locate D. fashion


13. A. qualify B. baggy C. grocery D. scenery


14. A. gather B. there C. ethnic D. although


15. A. exchange B. reach C. chance D.


champagne


Viết lại các câu său sao cho nghĩa của câu không đổi.


16. Keep your neighborhood clean and you will have an ideal place to live.


+ If ………..


17. Mr. Phong didn’t feel well. He didn’t go to work yesterday.


+ Mr. Phong didn’t go to work yesterday because ………
18. Although I


ate: 14/2/2006


Unit 7



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(147)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=147>

Lesson 3 Listen


<b>Objectives</b>



- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to talk about “How to save
energy”.


- Practice the skill of listening.


- Enrich vocabulary about saving energy.

<b>Teaching aids.</b>



- Book, teaching plan, chalk, tape, cassette …

<b>Teaching produce</b>



<b>+ Warm up.</b>


- T asks some questions.


<b>+Pre teaching.</b>


- T asks.


- T explants the content of the
exercise.


<b>+While-teaching</b>


- Listen to the tape.


- Let students choose the
statements are true or false.



- Ss work in groups to discuss
which statements are true,
which are false.


- Get some students to give the
answer. T corrects.


- Ss listen to the tape then
correct the false sentences.


- Listen to the tape.


- Work in groups to complete
the sentences.


- Listen to the tape to correct the
sentences.


- Get some students to read the
sentences.


- T corrects.


What do you do to save energy?


What do you do to save energy?


Listen to the news on solar energy and
decide whether the statements are true


or false, then fill in the blanks with
suitable words.


a) True or false


1. True 2. False 3. Falser
4. True 5. False


2. Most of our electricity now comes
from the use of coal, gas, oil, or nuclear
power.


3. One percent of the solar energy that
reaches the Earth is enough to provide
power for the total population.


5. All the building in Sweden will be
heated by solar energy in 2015.
b) Fill in


1. effective 2. pollution
3. countries 4. store
5. roof 6. instead
Tape transcript.


Are you looking for a cheap, clean,
effective source of power that doesn’t
cause pollution or waste natural


resources? Look for further than solar


energy from our sun.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(148)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=148>

<b>+Post-teaching</b>


- Get a student to read the
completed sentences.


- Ask some questions.


<b>+Home work.</b>


Do exercises: 3, 4 P. 48, 49


using solar energy. Solar panels are
placed on the roof of a house and the
sun’s energy is used to heat water. The
energy can be stored for a number of
days, so on cloudy days you can use
solar energy too.


Sweden has an advanced solar energy
program. There all buildings will be
heated by solar energy and car will use
solar power instead of gas by the year
2015.


How do you think about solar energy?
Do you think using solar energy is
saving money?



Date: 23/2/2006


Unit 7



<b>Saving energy</b>



Lesson 4 Read

<b>Objectives</b>



- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to talk about “How to save
energy”.


- Practice the skill of reading.


- Enrich vocabulary about saving energy.

<b>Teaching aids.</b>



- Book, teaching plant, chalk …

<b>Teaching produce</b>



<b>+ Warm up.</b>


- T asks some questions.


<b>+Pre teaching.</b>


- T asks


<b>+While-teaching</b>



- Introduce the content of the
text.


- T read the text. Ss listen.


- T gives some new words.


What do you do to save energy?


How much is your family’s electricity
bill?


How much electricity does your TV
use?


What do you do to save energy?


<b>New words</b>


Luxuries (n) xa xi pham
Necessities (n) nhu yeu pham
Consumer (n) nguoi tieu thu
Scheme {ski:m} (n) = plan


Effectively {ifektivli} (adv) co hieu
qua


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(149)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=149>

- Let ss read the text find out
which is the best summary of
the passage.



- Ss work in groups fin out the
best summery of the passage.


- Get a s to give the sentence.


- T corrects.


- Get a student to read the
questions.


- Let ss read the passage to get
the information to answer the
questions.


- Ss work in groups.


- Let ss practice in pairs.


- Get some pairs to practice.


- T corrects.


<b>+Post-teaching</b>


- Get a student to read sentences
with “used to”, “wish”.


- Give idea



- Let Ss read the sentences and
choose the option.


- Read the text check the
exercise.


- Get Ss to read sentences


- T correct


- Get Ss to read completed
sentences.


<b>+Home work</b>


Connectives
And


But
However
Therefore
Ultimately


a) Which of the following is the best
summary of the passage?


3. North American and European


countries are interested in saving money
and natural resources.



b) Answer the questions. Write the
answers in your exercise book.
1. Western consumers are interested


in products that will not only
work effectively but also save
money.


2. We can use energy saving bulbs
instead of ordinary 100 watt-light
bulbs to spend less on lighting.
3. She will pay US$2 for lighting if


she uses energy saving bulbs
instead.


4. the purpose of the labeling
scheme is to help consumers to
know how efficient each model
is, compared with other


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(150)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=150>

Period



Date of planning: 17/03


<b>Unit 8</b>


<b>celebrations</b>




<b>Lesson 4: Read</b>


<b>A. objective: </b>


<b>1. Knowledge: </b>By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to get general idea of
the reading through choosing the best summary and answering questions.


<b>2. Skill: </b>Reading comprehension for gist and details about ways to save energy.
B. <b>teaching aids: </b> subordinate, tapes, chalks and book


<b>c. procedure:</b>


1. Warm up :


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: greet and ask ss some Yes/ No questions


to lead into the lesson.


Ss: listen and try to answer the questions.


+ Do you usually turn off the light when it is
not necessary?


+ Do you usually go to school by bus?
+ Do you often put garbage into dustbin?
+ Do you usually use banana trees to wrap
things?


+ Do you usually turn off the tap when it is


not necessary?


+ Does your father often drive to work?


2. Pre- reading:


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: Pre-teach vocabulary


Ss: listen and note down.


T: check Ss’ understanding by asking ss to
make sentences using the new words
given.


Ss: listen and try to make them.


T: call on some Ss to read their sentences
aloud. Then give comment to make sure Ss
understand the use of the words.


Ss: raise the hand to read and listen to the
correction from the teacher.


<i>New words</i>


- lose heart: mất can đảm


- groom: chó rĨ



- give sb a hug: ôm chặt lấy ai


- consider (v) cân nhắc, xem xÐt
consideration (n)


considerate (adj) ân cần, chu đáo


- generous (adj) réng lỵng


- priority (n) sự u tiên hàng đầu


- sense of humor: tính hài hớc


- terrific (adj) cực kì, xuất sắc, tuyệt
vời


3. Reading


Teachers and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: ask ss to read the passage quickly and


answer the following questions


Ss: read and try to answer the questions
asked by teacher.


T: call on ss to answer the questions.
Then give correct answers


T: ask ss to read the passage more


carefully and choose the best summary
for it among four options given in the
book


Ss: read and think to choose.


T: call on ss to give their choice with their
explanation for it.


Ss: raise the hand to do.


T: feedback and give correct answer


Questions


a. To her father.


b. He is alive. Jane’s wrote the card to him
on father’s day.


c. It is his sense of humor.
Grammar


<b>Relative clauses</b>


Đại từ liên hệ là từ đứng lion sau một danh từ
để thay thế cho danh từ làm chủ từ, túc từ hoặc
sở hữu cách cho mệnh dề sau.


Danh tõ



đứng trớc chủ từ túc từ (tân ngữ) sở hữu cách


Ngêi who,


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(151)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=151>

Ss: listen and note down.


T: tell ss to read the passage again and
answer the questions.


Ss: read and think to answer.


T: ask ss to compare their answers with a
friend


Ss: do as the request.


T: call some Ss to read their answers
aloud before class


Ss: raise the hand to do.


T: make necessary corrections and give
correct answers


Ss: listen and note down the correct
answers.


VËt which,



that which, that of which
*Which


The dog won the race. The dog is mine.
-> The dog which won the race is mine.
I lent you the book. The book is interesting.
-> The book which I lent you is interesting.
*Who


I wrote the card to the man. The man teaches
me how to love, cry and laugh.


-> I wrote the card to the man who teaches me


*Whom


Nam is the only man. She loves Nam.
-> Nam is the only man whom she loves.


<b>4. Post </b>–<b> reading:</b>


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T gives some exercises


Ss do
T corrects


<i>do some exercises </i>



<b>5. Homework:</b>


T: remind the topic again and then assign ss homework: Learn new words by heart
and translate the passage into Vietnamese. Prepare “Unit 8: Write”.


Ss: listen and note down


<b>D. remark:</b>


Period



Date of planning: 17/03


<b>Unit 8</b>


<b>celebrations</b>



<b>Lesson 5: WRITE</b>


<b>A. objective: </b>


<b>1. Knowledge: </b>By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know how to write a
short, simple speech with clear organization about energy saving and other school-
related topics and present before the class


<b>2. Skill: </b>Writing


B. <b>teaching aids: </b> chalks, pictures, extra boards and book


<b>c. procedure:</b>



1. Warm up :


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: greet ss and ask them to do the


following exercise


Ss: listen to explanation and think to do the
exercise


T: call one Student to do and other listen
and remark.


Ss: raise the hand to do.


T: feedback and give correct answers


* Match the word in A to the word in B to
make completed words.


A B
1. Electricity a. Saving
2. Energy b. Machine
3. Washing c. Dryer
4. Tumble d. Countries
5. Western e. Bill


à 1.e 2.a 3.b 4.c 5.d



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(152)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=152>

Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: explain the definition of a speech


Ss: listen carefully


T: implicate the function of the parts of a
speech by questioning


Ss: listen and answer.
T: ask ss to match


Ss: think to match and then compare with a
friend


T: call on some Ss to give out their answer
Ss: raise the hand to do .


<i>A speech is the act of delivering a formal </i>
<i>spoken communication to an audience. A </i>
<i>speech usually has three parts : </i>


<i><b>Introduction, Body, </b>and<b> Conclusion.</b></i>


<b>* </b>Match :


3. Writing


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: ask ss to work in pair, put the sections in



the correct place to complete the speech.
Ss: work in pair


T: call on some Ss to deliver the speech
before the class


Ss: raise the hand to do .


T: comment and correct any necessary
mistakes. Then give suggested answer.
T: tell ss to choose one topic in the book to
write a speech.


Ss: choose and write


T: ask ss to compare the writing with a
friend in order to comment and check their
writing.


Ss: listen and do as the request.


* <b>Ordering.</b>


<i>Answer key : 3 - 2 </i>–<i> 1.</i>


<b>* Preparing and delivering a speech.</b>
<i>Choose one of the topics in the book: </i>


Reducing garbage, Reusing paper and Saving
energy in the kitchen<i> and then prepare a </i>


<i>speech for the class. </i>


<b>4. Post </b>–<b> writing:</b>


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: call on some Ss to deliver their speech


before the class


Ss: raise the hand to do.


T: give comments and Ss’ performance
regarding pronunciation, body language
eye contact


Ss: listen carefully.


* Suggested answer:
<i><b>Reducing garbage: </b></i>


Good evening everybody. I’m glad to b


e here this evening. My name is Nam. I


come from grade 9A. I’m going to tell


you about reusing paper.



Hi every body. It’s pleasure to be here


with you today. My name is Long. Our


topic today is ways of saving energy in


the kitchen.




<b>5. Homework:</b>


T: ask ss to write a speech on smt at home. Prepare the next lesson “ Unit 7 :
Language focus”


Ss: listen and note down.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(153)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=153>

Period



Date of planning: 17/03


<b>Unit 8</b>


<b>celebrations</b>



Lesson 6: language focus


<b>A. objective: </b>


<b>1. Knowledge: </b>By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know how to know some
grammar points in this unit such as :


+ Common connectives, phrasal verbs, and suggestion


<b>2. Skill : </b>Use grammatical points in communication and doing exercises
B. <b>teaching aids: </b> chalks and book.


<b>c. procedure:</b>


1. Warm up :



Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities
T: ask ss to work in group and review all


the ways to save energy which they have
learned in his unit.


Ss: work on group.


T: gather the ideas from Ss and have some
final thought on ways to save energy
Ss: listen and note down.


* Work in group to give some ways to save
energy .


2. Revision and 3. Practice:


Teacher’s and Students’ activities Content of the activities


Activity 1 : Relative clauses



T: explain function of

Relative clauses



Ss: listen carefully


T: ask ss to make examples or


demonstrate he use of

Relative clauses

.
Ss: apply to do.


T: request ss to do Ex1
Ss: think to do


T; call on some Ss to give their answers
before the class


Ss: raise the hand to do


T: feedback and give correct answers


1. Join the sentences. Use relative clauses.
a. … which is sung on New Year’s Eve.
b. The watch which was given to … is a gift.
c. My friend Tom who sings … can compose
songs.


d.


Activity 2 : Relative clauses.



T: implicit the meaning of phrasal verbs
through example


Ss: listen carefully. And guess the
meaning of the phrasal.


T: ask Ss to do exercise 2.
Ss: think to do



T; call on some Ss to do
Ss: raise the hand to do


T: feedback to give correct answers.
Ss: listen and note down.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(154)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=154>

<b>Activity 3 : Adverb clauses of concession</b>


T: help ss to review some structures to use
the connections.


Ss: listen and note down.


T: divide class into two teams. Team 1
make suggestions to help the poor in the
neighborhood of their school. Team 2
make suggestions to improve their
English.


Ss: work in group to make suggestions,
using the ideas in the textbooks.


T: call on some Ss to read aloud their
suggestions.


Adverb clauses of concession (mệnh đề chỉ sự
nhợng bộ)


Mệnh đề chỉ sự nhợng bộ bawt đầu bằng



<b>though, although, even if, despite, in spite </b>
<b>of, however, whatever.</b>


although
though


even though + clause
even if


<b>Activity 4 : Adverb clauses of concession</b>


T: let ss look at the pictures then complete
the sentences. Use the correct tense of the
verbs


4. Look at the pictures. Complete the


sentences. Use the correct tense of the verbs
and the information.


a.


b. … she is watching TV.


c. … the weather bureau predicted the weather
would be fine.


d. Ba ate lot food ……….


e. … Lan tried to finish her letter.



<b>4. Homework:</b>


T: focus on the main grammar points in the lesson. Ask ss to complete all the
exercises in the workbook. Prepare for the next unit.


Ss: listen and note down


<b>D. remark :</b>


Unit 10



<b>Life on other planets</b>



Lesson 1 Getting Started + listen and read

<b>A- Objectives.</b>



- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to talk about possibility.


- Seek information.


- Write an exposition.


+ Grammar: - Modals: may; might


- Conditional sentences; type1 and type 2.

<b>B- Teaching aids.</b>



- Book, teaching plant, pictures about UFO, aliens, chalk …

<b>C- Teaching produce.</b>




<b>1. Warm up.</b>


- T asks some questions. (in text
book)


1. GETTING STARTED


a. Have you ever heard about UFOs?
Do you think they really exist?
b. Have you ever seen any films on


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(155)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=155>

<b> 2. Pre teaching.</b>


- T asks some questions about
UFOs and aliens.


<b>3. While-teaching</b>


- Introduce the content of the
text.


- T read the text. Ss listen.


- T gives some new words.


- Let ss read the text find out
which is the best summary of
the passage.



- Ss work in groups fin out the
best summery of the passage.


- Get a s to give the sentence.


- T corrects.


- Get a student to read the
questions.


- Let ss read the passage to get
the information to answer the
questions.


- Ss work in groups.


- Let ss practice in pairs.


- Get some pairs to practice.


- T corrects.


<b>4. Post-teaching</b>


- Get a student to read sentences
with “used to”, “wish”.


2. listen and read.


+ What can you see in the pictures?


+


How much is your family’s electricity
bill?


How much electricity does your TV
use?


What do you do to save energy?


<b>New words</b>


Luxuries (n) xa xi pham
Necessities (n) nhu yeu pham
Consumer (n) nguoi tieu thu
Scheme {ski:m} (n) = plan


Effectively {ifektivli} (adv) co hieu
qua


Efficiency (adj.) hieu suat cao
Innovation (n) su doi moi


Connectives
And


But
However
Therefore
Ultimately



c) Which of the following is the best
summary of the passage?


3. North American and European


countries are interested in saving money
and natural resources.


d) Answer the questions. Write the
answers in your exercise book.
5. Western consumers are interested


in products that will not only
work effectively but also save
money.


6. We can use energy saving bulbs
instead of ordinary 100 watt-light
bulbs to spend less on lighting.
7. She will pay US$2 for lighting if


she uses energy saving bulbs
instead.


8. the purpose of the labeling
scheme is to help consumers to
know how efficient each model
is, compared with other



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(156)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=156>

- Give idea


- Let Ss read the sentences and
choose the option.


- Read the text check the
exercise.


- Get Ss to read sentences


- T correct


- Get Ss to read completed
sentences.


<b>5. Home work</b>


</div>

<!--links-->

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về

Tải bản đầy đủ ngay
×